Rdependable Const. Inc

PROJECT MANUAL

IT DEPARTMENT IMPROVEMENTS BUILDING B

500 S. SANTA FE COMPTON, CA 90220

For: Compton Unified School District 429 South Oleander Street Compton, CA 90220 (310) 639-4321 Fax (310) 631-9871

Bid Number:

Prepared by:

VILLARRUEL ARCHITECTS, INC. Architecture/Planning

16140 Valerio Street, Suite B Van Nuys, CA 91406-2916

(818) 756-0425 FAX (818) 782-4116

COMPTON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT IT DEPARTMENT – BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS

GUIDE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010-1

GUIDE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work ......................................................................................................................... 02 01019 Contract Considerations ............................................................................................................... 03 01027 Applications for Payment .............................................................................................................. 04 01030 Alternates ...................................................................................................................................... 01 01035 Modification Procedures ............................................................................................................... 02 01040 Coordination .................................................................................................................................. 03 01045 Cutting and Patching ..................................................................................................................... 05 01050 Schedule of Values ....................................................................................................................... 02 01080 Application for Payment ............................................................................................................... 03 01120 Alteration Project Procedures ....................................................................................................... 05 01200 Project Meetings ............................................................................................................................ 03 01210 Allowance ...................................................................................................................................... 03 01300 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................... 06 01320 Construction Schedule - Bar Chart .............................................................................................. 05 01350 Alteration and Hazardous Material Procedures ........................................................................... 05 01400 Quality Control Services ............................................................................................................... 03 01405 Testing and Inspection .................................................................................................................. 05 01421 Reference Standards and Definitions .......................................................................................... 03 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls .......................................................................... 07 01600 Materials and Equipment .............................................................................................................. 04 01631 Substitutions .................................................................................................................................. 03 01650 Starting of Systems ...................................................................................................................... 02 01700 Contract Closeout ......................................................................................................................... 04 01720 Project Record Documents ........................................................................................................... 02 01740 Warranties ..................................................................................................................................... 05 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02050 Demolition...................................................................................................................................... 04 02230 Site Clearing .................................................................................................................................. 02 02316 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Pavement ............................................................... 04 02319 Base Course .................................................................................................................................. 03 02520 Site Concrete ................................................................................................................................. 02 02575 Pavement Repair .......................................................................................................................... 03 02821 Chain Link Fencing ....................................................................................................................... 06 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork ....................................................................................................................... 02 03200 Concrete Reinforcement ............................................................................................................... 02 03300 Cast in Place Concrete ................................................................................................................. 11 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS Not used


GUIDE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010-2

DIVISIONS 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................................................... 04 06115 Sheathing ..................................................................................................................................... 03 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation ........................................................................................................................ 04 07560 Roof Patch & Repairs ................................................................................................................... 11 07600 Flashing & Sheet Metal ................................................................................................................. 05 07920 Joint Sealants ................................................................................................................................ 08 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08113 Metal Doors Frames...................................................................................................................... 03 08210 Wood Doors .................................................................................................................................. 07 08520 Aluminum Windows ...................................................................................................................... 04 08710 Door Hardware .............................................................................................................................. 14 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09100 Metal Support Systems ................................................................................................................. 05 09206 Metal Lath ...................................................................................................................................... 03 09220 Portland Cement Plaster ............................................................................................................... 03 09260 Gypsum Board System ................................................................................................................. 05 09658 Rubber Base ................................................................................................................................. 03 09665 Sheet Vinyl Flooring ...................................................................................................................... 02 09680 Carpet ............................................................................................................................................ 03 09900 Painting .......................................................................................................................................... 12 DIVISION 10 through 14 Not Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 General Provisions ....................................................................................................................... 12 15840 Air Transmission and Distribution System ................................................................................... 09 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements ...................................................................................................... 04 16050 Basic Electrical Materials .............................................................................................................. 12 16111 Conduits ........................................................................................................................................ 06 16510 Light Fixtures ................................................................................................................................. 03 16715 Fire Alarm ...................................................................................................................................... 10 16955 Project Completion ........................................................................................................................ 02

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the site and interior improvements to Building B at 500 S. Santa Fe Ave as indicated on Drawings as indicated on Drawings and as specified, including Addenda and Clarifications. Building A will be addressed at a later date.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Document – Special Conditions.

B. Document – General Conditions.

1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. All materials and products for the project shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original, undamaged, factory sealed containers, with factory applied labels intact and legible.

B. The labels shall contain the following information as applicable: Manufacturer’s name and address; brand name; product designation; type, class or grade; size or weight; batch number; testing lab certification and color.

1.04 STANDARD REFERENCES

A. Any material or procedure specified by reference to number, symbol, or title of a specific standard, such as a commercial standard, a Federal Specific, a trade association standard, or other similar standard document shall comply with requirements in latest revision thereof and any amendment or supplement thereto in effect on date of executed Contract, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference.

1.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Equipment shall be furnished and installed in location and orientation indicated on Drawings. The District inspector will verify permanent exact locations at time Contractor is ready to set equipment.

B. Equipment shall be properly plumbed and leveled by means of metal shims or spacers, in such a manner that with all mounting bolts fully tightened, no distortion nor undue stresses will be set up within equipment. Contractor shall furnish necessary bolts, washers, fittings and wood blocking, to properly install equipment.

C. Floor Mounted Equipment:

1. Equipment designed or specified to be attached to concrete construction shall be secured with anchor bolts and tampins, cinch anchors or Fastite bolts and shells of size recommended by manufacturer of equipment, or as required for secure mounting.

2. Equipment designed or specified to be attached to wood construction shall be secured with machine bolts or lag screw, of size recommended by manufacturer of equipment, and as directed by District Inspector.

D. Bench Mounted Equipment: Secure to bench or table by machine bolts of suitable size.


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2

1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching shall match surrounding work in finish and workmanship.

B. Cutting, boring, saw cutting or drilling through new or existing structural elements to be done only when so detailed in Drawings or accepted by the Architect (or Structural Engineer), with approval the DSA representative.

1.07 FINAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE

A. A final examination shall be made when work is substantially complete, except for minor corrective items, in accordance with Paragraph 18 of Form 82.39.

B. Before final examination, completed Documentation Checklist shall have been received and Project Record Drawings, signed by appropriate sub-contractors, shall be prepared and ready for transmittal to the District.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION


CONTRACT CONSIDERATION 01019 - 1

SECTION 01019

CONTRACT CONSIDERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Schedule of values.

B. Applications for payment.

C. Change procedures.

D. Defect Assessment.

E. Measurement and payment - unit prices.

F. Alternatives.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit a printed schedule on AlA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet.

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after Notice of Intent to Award.

C. Format: Utilize the portions of the Table of Contents of this Project Manual identified in the work included for each Bid Division in Section 01010. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and General Conditions may be included in the above line items, or listed as separate items.

D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application For Payment. Construction Manager will inform the Contractor when a Change Order has been approved, and can be included in future Applications for Payment.

1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT (Refer to Section 01027 for more detail)

A. Submit 6 copies of each application on AlA Form G722 - Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment and AlA Form G723 - Project Application Summary.

B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.

C. Payment Period: First day of the month through last day of the month.

D. Include six (6) copies of a conditional release for the work included in the current payment application.

E. Include six (6) copies of unconditional releases from subcontractors and suppliers for the work included in the previous application.

F. Include six (6) copies of the certified payroll as required by the Labor Code Section 1771.5.

G. Application for payment shall not be processed without the required releases and certified payroll documents.

H. This project is funded from several distinct funding sources, each of which will require separate accounting. The work will be separated into several distinct schedules of value, each of which will require separate applications for payment for each payment period.



1.04 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. The Construction Manager and Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AlA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.

B. The Construction Manager may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within seven (7) days.

C. The Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to the Construction Manager, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other Contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.

D. Stipulated Sum Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed estimated maximum price quotation for Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Construction Manager.

E. Unit Price Change Order: For contract unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

F. Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a directive, on AlA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. .

G. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Construction Manager will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

I. Change Order Form: AlA G701/CM Change Order.

J. Execution of Change Orders: Construction Manager will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Construction Manager will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.



1.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES

A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections.

B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Construction Manager will verify measurements and quantities

C. Unit Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work shall determine payment.

D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant and facilities, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.

1.07 ALTERNATIVES

A. Accepted Alternatives will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required.

C. Schedule of Alternates: NOT APPLICABLE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE.

END OF SECTION


APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 1

SECTION 01027

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.

1. Schedules: The Contractor's Progress Schedule is specified in Division 1 Section "Progress

Schedules." 1.03 COST BREAKDOWN

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Cost Breakdown with preparation of the Contractor's Progress Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Cost Breakdown with other required administrative schedules

and forms, including:

a. Schedule of estimated monthly payments to be due Contractor. b. Contractor's Progress Schedule. c. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. d. List of subcontractors. e. List of products. f. Schedule of submittals. g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

2. Submit the Cost Breakdown to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than

10 days after award of Contract.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Cost Breakdown. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Arrange the Cost Breakdown in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following

for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. h. Percentage of Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100

percent.



2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Price.

4. Provide a separate line item in the Cost Breakdown for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include

requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.

5. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Cost Breakdown and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item.

6. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Cost Breakdown or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Cost Breakdown with each Application for

Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the District.

1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Completion, and

the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the

form for Applications for Payment, unless directed otherwise by the District.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Cost Breakdown and the Contractor's Progress Schedule.

Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives approved by District and issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to

the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Each copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.



1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

F. Waivers of Stop Notices: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of Stop Notices

from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a Stop Notice arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for

retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final unconditional waivers and releases.

3. The District reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.

4. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a Stop Notice.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers on forms prescribed by California Civil Code.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or

coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Cost Breakdown 4. Contractor's Progress Schedule. 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Submittal Schedule. 7. Initial progress report. 8. Report of preconstruction meeting. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. 11. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

H. Application for Payment at Completion: Following issuance of the Architect's Certificate of

Completion, submit an Application for Payment.

1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Completion issued previously for District's occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application

include:

a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Startup performance reports. g. Changeover information related to District's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. h. Final cleaning. i. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety, if applicable.



j. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. k. Final progress photographs. l. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of

Completion. m. Completion of Contract closeout requirements. n. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the District. o. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. p. Removal of temporary facilities and services. q. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. r. Settlement of all claims. s. Change of door locks to District's access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


ALTERNATES 01030-1

SECTION 01030

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain Work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the District decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Price to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Price.

1.04 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in

writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.

D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES (TO BE DETERMINED) END OF SECTION


MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-1

SECTION 01035

MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for administrative procedures governing

Applications for Payment.

2. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions, or such other form as Architect determines.

1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. District-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them

as an instruction either to stop Work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the District's review.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of

purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to

the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.


MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2

a. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Price and Contract Time.

b. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of

purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

c. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

d. Comply with requirements in Division 1 "Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests,

unless Architect determines otherwise.

1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the District's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the District and the Contractor on AIA Form G701, or such other form as determined by Architect.

1.06 DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT APPROVAL

A. Changes to State-approved Drawings and Specifications must be approved by an addendum or a change order approved by the Division of the State Architect, as required by Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations.


END OF SECTION


COORDINATION 01040-1

SECTION 01040

COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. General Project coordination procedures.

2. Conservation.

3. Coordination drawings.

4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

5. Cleaning and protection.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and

preinstallation conferences.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Progress Schedule.

3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation.

4. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

C. The work will be performed under a multiple prime contract.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for

required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.



B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for the District and separate contractors where coordination of

their work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules.

2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.

3. Delivery and processing of submittals.

4. Progress meetings.

5. Contract closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.

1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.

2. Indicate required installation sequences.

3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."

B. Staff Names: Within 10 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the

Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, temporary field office, and at each temporary

telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS



A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity

of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

END OF SECTION


CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1

SECTION 01045

CUTTING AND PATCHING


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1. Requirements of this Section also apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to

Division-15 and Division-16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

2. Refer to Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the

building for alterations.

C. Cutting and patching is included and required for all Work of the Contract. The Contractor shall make allowances for, and provide all labor and materials for the concealment of new Work, unless specifically stated otherwise. Patching materials and finishes shall match existing adjacent conditions unless stated otherwise.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. A Cutting and Patching Proposal is required for the following situations:

1. When cutting and patching is required in areas where installed materials, products, or systems do not perform in accordance with the Contract Documents, where structural or operational elements are affected, where Work was installed out of proper sequence, or in other situations where new Work must be removed or replaced, whatever the reason.

2. Do not cut any structural members unless it is detailed on the Drawings and approved by

the Architect, Structural Engineer and the DSA.

B. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Obtain approval of procedures for cutting and patching before proceeding. Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed; indicate

why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.



4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.

5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the

Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Obtain Architect and DSA Representative approval of the cutting and patching proposal

before cutting and patching the following structural elements:

a. Foundation construction.

b. Bearing and retaining walls.

c. Structural concrete.

d. Structural steel.

e. Lintels.

f. Structural decking.

g. Timber and primary wood framing.

h. Miscellaneous structural metals.

i. Equipment supports.

j. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the

following:

a. Primary operational elements or systems.

b. Air or smoke barriers.

c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

d. Membranes and flashings.

e. Fire protection systems.

f. Noise and vibration control elements.



g. Control systems.

h. Communications systems.

i. Electrical wiring systems.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible retain the original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch the following categories

of exposed Work, or if it is not possible to engage the original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm:

a. Processed concrete finishes.

b. Exterior plaster or wall finish system.

c. Carpeting.

d. Wallcovering.

e. Firestopping.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surface cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use materials identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Patch and repair all areas affected by demolition, construction and remodeling work with materials, methods and finishes to match existing adjacent conditions.

B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching of work related to its scope of

work, unless stated otherwise. 3.02 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.

3.03 PREPARATION



A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the

building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.04 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained

or adjoining construction.

1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side

into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill.

4. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division-2 where cutting and patching

requires excavating and backfilling. Sawcut pavements to provide a straight, neat edge for patching; do not overcut corners at adjoining sawcuts.

5. By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are shown

or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after bypassing and cutting.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained

adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor, ceiling, and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor, ceiling, and wall coverings and materials and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.



a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire

surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed. Remove paint, mortar, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to original condition.

END OF SECTION


SCHEDULE OF VALVES 01050 - 1

SECTION 01050

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Procedure for submission of a certified Schedule of Values for review and approval by the OAR.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01080: Application for Payment

B. Section 01040: Coordination

C. Section 01300: Submittals

D. Section 01320: Construction Schedule

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Upon receipt of the Notice of Intent to Award, CONTRACTOR shall commence preparation of a Schedule of Values in accordance with the information contain here-on and in the General Conditions.

B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the preparation of a Schedule of Values with preparation of the Construction Schedule as set forth in Section 01320. The corresponding values from the specification division totals on cost loaded schedule shall match with the approved Schedule of Values.

C. Include the following Project identification on a certified Schedule of Values:

1. Project name and location

2. Project Number

3. Contract #

4. CONTRACTOR name

5. Date of Submittal

D. The Schedule of Values shall be in tabular form with separate columns and shall include the following items:

1. Related Specification Section and Division

2. Description of Work

3. Name of Subcontractor, manufacturer or supplier.

4. Dollar value, quantity and unit of measure of each line item

5. Percentage of Contract amount to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100%


SCHEDULE OF VALVES 01050 - 2

E. Round amounts to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Amount.

F. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Amount in enough detail acceptable to AOR to facilitate continued evaluation of Application for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of content and Schedule of Values form under Section 01020. Provide line items for subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

G. Provide separate line items for items in the Schedule of Values for total installed value of that part of the Work.

H. Provide separate line item for labor and material when required by the AOR.

I. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item except the amounts shown as separate line items as indicated under Schedule of Values form under Section 01020.

J. Temporary facilities and other cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place shall be shown as separate line items as indicated under Schedule of Values form under Section 01020.

K. An approved certified Schedule of Values shall serve as the basis for the monthly certified Application for Payment.

L. If at any time, OWNER determines, in its reasonable discretion, that the schedule of Values does not approximate the actual cost being incurred by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work, CONTRACTOR shall prepare, for AOR approval, a revised Schedule of Values, which then shall be used as the basis for future progress payments. Without changing the Contract Amount, OWNER reserves the right to require CONTRACTOR:

1. To increase or decrease amounts within the line items in the Schedule of Values; and,

2. To conform the price breakdown to OWNER accounting practice.

3.02 SUBMITTAL

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit five (5) certified copies of a Schedule of Values for review and approval by the AOR at least 14 days before the first Application for Payment.

B. AOR will review and if necessary, return the submitted Schedule of Values with summary comments noting items not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall revise the submitted Schedule of Values and return five (5) copies within three (3) days of receipt of summary comments.

C. Signature by AOR shall constitute acceptance of the submitted Schedule of Values.

D. An approved copy of the Schedule of Values by AOR will be transmitted to CONTRACTOR, and IOR.

END OF SECTION


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 01080 - 1

SECTION 01080

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for a certified Application for Payment.

1. Coordinate the certified Schedule of Values and certified Application for Payment with, but not limited to, the Construction Schedule, submittal log, and list of Subcontractors.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 01050: Schedule of Values

B. Section 01320: Construction Schedule

C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each certified Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as reviewed by AOR, paid for by OWNER, and:

1. The initial Application for Payment and Final Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The period of Work covered by each Application for Payment is payment date for each progress payment as specified in the General Conditions. The period covered by each Application for Payment is previous month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use OWNER provided forms for the Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of CONTRACTOR. AOR will return incomplete applications without action.

E. Transmittal: Submit a minimum of six (6) signed and original copies of each certified Application for Payment to AOR. All copies shall be complete, including releases and similar attachments.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to AOR.

F. Initial Application for Payment within 60 days of issuance of Notice to Proceed: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal for first certified Application for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Certified Schedule of Values

2. Performance and payment bonds.



3. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

4. Worker Compensation certificates, if applicable.

5. Auto Insurance, if applicable.

6. Hazardous Material Insurance Certificates, if applicable.

7. Construction Schedule

8. Submittal Schedule

9. Emergency Contact List

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of Work

11. Certified Payroll (Submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by OWNER including hard copy)

12. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

13. Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations

G. Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of Progress Applications for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by OWNER including hard copy)

2. Updated and current Project Record Drawings (as-built).

3. Monthly Construction Schedule (updated, submitted and approved)

4. Approved Schedule of Values

5. List of Subcontractors (Payments Summary)

6. Storm Water Pollution Prevention (SWPP) – Site Monitoring Report

7. Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations

H. Final Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following AOR issuance of certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment:

1. Administrative actions, submittals and/or Work that shall precede or coincide with this application include:

a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals by authorities having legal jurisdiction over Work.

b. Removal of temporary facilities and services.

c. Testing, adjusting and balance records.

d. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.

e. Meter readings.

f. Start-up performance reports.

g. OWNER training and orientations.



h. Operating and maintenance instruction manuals.

i. Preliminary Warranties, guarantees and maintenance agreements.

j. Delivery of extra materials, products and or stock.

k. Change over information related to OWNER occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

l. Final cleaning.

m. Ensure that Work is completed.

n. Advise on shifting insurance coverage.

o. List of defective Work, recognized as exceptions to certificate of Substantial Completion.

p. Change of door locks, including keys, to OWNER system.

q. Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by the OWNER including hard copy)

r. Certification that all benefit contributions due and owing to appropriate union trusts have been paid by CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors, as specified by the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) and Article 6.53 of the General Conditions.

s. Storm Water Pollution Prevention – Site Monitoring Reports, SWPP revisions, compliance certifications, and Notice of Termination (NOT) (see Section 01330)

t. Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations

u. Waivers and releases for CONTRACTOR

END OF SECTION


ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01120-1

SECTION 01120

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General requirements for special project procedures pertaining to the alteration or modification of existing construction, and is complimentary to like requirements indicated or specified elsewhere. Principals items included are:

1. Removals, cutting, alterations and repairs to existing facilities as required to complete

work.

2. Relocation and reinstallation of existing construction and finish.

3. Salvage, storage and protection of existing items to be reinstalled.

4. Salvage and delivery to the District of items so designated for removal and salvaged by Contractor, as directed.


A. Requirements of other Sections of this Specification apply to this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01302: Submittals.

1. Submit proposed Work schedules itemizing dates and hours that the various items of Work in existing facilities will be started and completed. The District reserves the right to modify the proposed schedules, to eliminate conflicts and to insure the use of facilities during the Work.

a. Follow schedule exactly as finally approved by the District. No extra payment will be

made to Contractor for portions of the Work required to be performed during night, Saturday, Sunday, or holiday hours. Revise and resubmit schedules when timing or sequence changes occur or are ordered by the District.

1.04 PROPERTY INVENTORY

A. District property that the District intends to remove, will be removed at no cost to Contractor, before a room or space is vacated for the Work. Before performing any Work in each room or space the District and Contractor shall prepare a detailed initial written inventory of District property remaining therein and condition thereof including equipment and telephone instruments, and each shall retain a copy of the inventory dated and signed by both. In same manner, prior to the District reoccupancy of each such room or space the parties shall again inventory District property therein and all discrepancies between the inventories shall be Contractor's responsibility as specified above.



1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. General: Coordinate the Work of all trades and with the District to assure correct sequence, limits, methods, and times of performance. Arrange the Work to impose minimum hardship on operation and use of the facilities. Install protection for existing facilities, contents, and new work against dust, dirt, weather, damage, and vandalism, and maintain and relocate as the Work progresses.

B. Access: Confine entrances and exit operations to access routes designated by the District.

C. Existing Portable Items: The District will remove portable equipment, furniture, and supplies

from involved existing areas prior to start of Work therein. Cover and protect remaining items. (See Article 1.04-A, above).

D. Existing Conditions: Intent of Drawings is to indicate existing site and facility conditions with

information developed from original construction documents, field surveys, and the District records, and to generally indicate amount and type of demolition and removals required to prepare existing areas for new work.

E. Verification of Conditions: Perform a detailed survey of existing site and building conditions

pertaining of the Work before starting Work. Report to the District Inspector discrepancies or conflicts between Drawings and actual conditions in writing for clarification and instructions and do not perform Work where such discrepancies or conflicts occur prior to receipt of the District Inspector's instructions.

F. Special Noise Restrictions: Use care to prevent generation of unnecessary noise and keep

noise levels to minimum possible. When ordered by the District Inspector, immediately discontinue such methods that produce noise disruptive or harmful to facility functions and occupants, and employ unobjectionable methods. Equip air compressors, tractors, cranes, hoists, vehicles, and other internal combustion engine equipment with "residential" grade mufflers, and muffle the unloading cycle of compressors. Remove from site any equipment producing objectionable noise as determined by the District Inspector.

G. Shoring and Bracing: Provide supports, shoring, and bracing required to preserve structural

integrity and prevent collapse of existing construction that is cut into or altered as a part of the Work.

H. Overloading: Do not overload any part of structures beyond safe carrying capacity by

placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.

I. Building Security: Secure building entrances and exits with locking or other approved method in accordance with the District's instructions.

J. Safeguarding the District Property: Contractor assumes custody, and responsibility for

safeguarding District's property both fixed and portable, remaining in rooms vacated for use during Work. District property shall remain contractor's responsibility until work is complete and rooms are reoccupied by District.

1. Covering and Cleaning: Cover and protect surfaces of rooms and spaces turned over

for the Work, including the District's property remaining therein, as required to prevent soiling or damage by dust, dirt, water, fumes, or otherwise, and protect other areas where Work is performed in same manner, as deemed adequate by the District. Prior to District's reoccupancy of any such room or space, clean all surfaces including District's



property in accordance with General Conditions and other cleaning instructions as may be specified in other Sections.

K. Use of District's Telephones: Do not use nor allow anyone other than District employees to use telephone in rooms and spaces turned over to Contractor for the Work except in the case of a bona fide emergency. Install temporary dial locks on telephone instruments to prevent all unauthorized use, or arrange and pay for temporary removal and reinstallation of instruments. Reimburse to the District all telephone toll charges originating from the telephones in such rooms and spaces except those arising from emergencies or use by District employees.

L. Protection of Floors: Use care to protect all floor surfaces and coverings from damage.

Equip mobile equipment with pneumatic tires. 1.06 REMOVAL, ALTERATIONS AND REPAIRS

A. Basic Requirement: Restore and refinish new and existing construction and improvements that are cut into, damaged, relocated, reinstalled, or left unfinished by removals to original condition or to match adjoining Work and finishes unless otherwise indicated, specified, directed, or required. Workmanship and materials shall conform to applicable provisions of other Sections. Provide new fasteners, connectors, adhesives, and other accessory materials as required to fully complete approved reinstallations and restorations. Where restorations and refinishing are defective or are otherwise not acceptable to the District, remove all the defective or rejected materials and provide new acceptable materials and finish at no extra cost to the District.

B. Extent: Perform removals to extent required plus such additional removals as are necessary

for completion even though not indicated or specified. More or less of the existing construction may be removed if such variation will expedite the Work and reduce the cost to the District, subject to prior approval in each case by the District Inspector.

C. Removals: Carefully remove Work to be salvaged or reinstalled and store under cover.

1. Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings: Remove by cutting down and not by tumbling, throwing,

or dropping.

2. Concrete: Saw with powered concrete saw, or chip where sawing is not feasible, to prevent spalling of concrete to remain. Cut off reinforcing bars, except where bonded into new concrete or masonry, and paint ends with bituminous paint before enclosing.

3. Woodwork: Cut or remove to a joint or panel line. Undamaged removed material may

be reused.

4. Sheet Metal: Remove back to joint, lap, or connection. Secure loose or unfastened ends or edges and make watertight.

5. Glass: Remove broken or damaged glass and clean rebates and stops of setting

materials.

6. Plaster: Cut back to sound plaster on straight lines, and back-bevel edges of remaining plaster. Trim existing lath and prepare for new lath.



7. Gypsum Wallboard: Cut back on straight lines to undamaged surfaces, with at least two opposite cut edges centered on supports.

8. Acoustical Ceilings: Remove hanger wires where ceilings are not reinstalled.

9. Tile: Cut back to sound tile and backing on joint lines if portions are to remain.

10. Flooring: Completely remove flooring and clean backing of old cement or adhesive.

Carefully remove wood flooring for patching and repairing of existing wood flooring to remain.

11. Miscellaneous Items: Grind items not mentioned but required to be removed in such

manner as minimizes damage to Work to remain.

D. Patching, Repairing and Finishing:

1. Concrete: Keep the cut edges damp for 24 hours and scrub with a neat portland cement mortar just before new concrete is placed; epoxy adhesive may be used in lieu of cement mortar. Finish new concrete to match existing. Provide 3,000 psi concrete for repairs except 2,000 psi concrete may be used for exterior walkway slabs on grade. At cut concrete edges to remain exposed, apply adhesive and restore with minimum 3/4" thick cement mortar finished to match adjoining surfaces.

2. Metal Items: Grind cut edges to remain exposed smooth and rounded.

3. Woodwork: Trim back to joint lines or splices, retrim cut surfaces, and patch new

matching or undamaged remove materials.

4. Sheet Metal: Restore removed or damaged sheet metal items as required or directed.

5. Glass: Install new matching glass and calk all existing exterior windows.

6. Lath and Plaster:

a. Lath: Lath surfaces to be patched with matching lath as required, secured to supports at 6" centers. Lap new lath 6" over existing and wire-tie new and existing lath edges together at 6" intervals. Restore paper backings as required, shingled into existing.

b. Plaster: Apply a bonding agent on cut edges of existing plaster. Apply 3-coat

plaster patching of type, thickness, finish, color, and texture to match existing plaster.

7. Gypsum Wallboard: Refasten cut edges of existing wallboard. Apply patches with at

least two opposite edges centered on supports and secure at 6" centers. Tape and finish joints and fastener heads. Make patching nonapparent when painted.

8. Acoustical Ceilings: Conform to requirements specified herein as necessary to match

the existing conditions.

9. Resilient Flooring: Completely remove damaged flooring and clean off all old cement as specified. Install new flooring of color, pattern, and type as specified.



10. Painted Surfaces: Prepare patched areas and refinish as specified in Section 09900: Painting.



1.07 PREPARATION OF EXISTING WORK

A. Holes: Drill holes through existing concrete or masonry for new conduit and/or piping, and do not jack-hammer.

B. Sandblasting: Work includes sandblasting of existing surfaces to receive materials secured

by cementitious, adhesive, or chemical bond (such as concrete, toppings, elastomeric coatings, plaster, mortar, etc.), and the sandblasting of other surfaces as shown, specified, directed, or required for proper preparation of surfaces. Completely remove existing finishes, stains, oil, grease, bitumen, penetrated mastics and adhesives including primers, and substances deleterious to bond or connection of new materials, and expose clean sound surfaces. Employ wet sandblasting for interior surfaces, and for exterior surfaces where directed or necessary to prevent creation of a dust nuisance or required by Code.

C. Salvage: Existing removed items not indicated or specified to be reused or reinstalled the

District intends to retain will be designated by District prior to start of removals in pertaining area. Carefully remove, salvage, box or bundle as approved, and deliver such items to storage at the site as the District Inspector directs.

D. Disposal: Conform to General Conditions. Dispose of removed material off the District's

property except existing items to be salvaged or reinstalled. Promptly remove waste and debris and do not allow to accumulate within facilities or on site

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1

SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Preconstruction conferences.

2. Preinstallation conferences.

3. Progress meetings.

4. Coordination meetings.


1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating Project meetings with

other construction activities.

2. Such other Sections where preinstallation conferences are required.

C. The work will be performed under a multiple prime contract. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The District and the Architect shall schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. The conference will be held at the Project site. The meeting will review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the District, Architect, and their consultants; each

Contractor; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

Tentative Progress Schedule.

Contractor's plan of operations. Critical Work sequencing. Designation of responsible personnel with addresses and phone numbers. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of Contract Documents. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Preparation of record documents. Use of the premises.



Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. Security. Housekeeping. Working hours. Testing and inspection requirements, including special inspections. Quality control procedures. Proof of insurances. Substitution requirements.

D. The Architect or District shall keep minutes of meeting and distribute copies to all interested parties.

1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. A preinstallation conference will be held at the Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.

1. The progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity

under consideration will be reviewed at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following:

Contract Documents.

Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples. Review of mockups, if any. Possible conflicts. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities. Space and access limitations. Governing regulations. Safety. Inspecting and testing requirements. Required performance results. Recording requirements. Protection. 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings will be held at the Project site at regular intervals, but not less often than once per week. The District and/or the Architect will schedule the meeting dates. The dates of meetings will be coordination of preparation of payment request.



B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the District and the Architect, each Contractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Topics for discussion appropriate to the status of the Project will include:

1. Contractor's Progress Schedule: Progress since the last meeting will be reviewed. Each

activity in relation to the Contractor's Progress Schedule, will be determined as to whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Construction behind schedule will be expedited, and commitments from parties involved to do so will be obtained. Insure that schedule revisions and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

2. Present and future needs of each entity present will be reviewed.

D. Reporting: Minutes of the meeting will be distributed to each party present and to parties who

should have been present. A brief summary will be included of progress since the previous meeting and report.

1. Schedule Updating: The schedule will be revised after each meeting or activity, where

revisions have been recognized or made, and issued concurrently with report of each meeting.


END OF SECTION


ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1

SECTION 01210

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B. Selected materials and equipment are specified in Contract Documents by allowances. Where specified, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

1.02 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At earliest practical date after award of Contract, advise Construction Manager, through Construction Manager, of date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by allowance must be completed to avoid delaying work.

B. At Construction Manager’s request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Construction Manager from designated supplier.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in form specified in Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCE

A. Inspection and testing allowance include cost of engaging inspection or testing agencies, actual inspections and tests, and reporting results.

B. Allowances does not include incidental labor required to assist testing agency or costs for retesting upon failure or previous tests and inspections.

C. Cost of services not required by Contract Documents are not included in allowance.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in inspection and testing allowance to CUSD by Change Order.

1.05 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials to manufacturer or supplier for credit to CUSD after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. When requested by Construction Manager, prepare unused material for storage by CUSD where it is not economically practical to return material for credit. When directed by Construction Manager, deliver unused material to CUSD’s designated storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor’s responsibility.



1.06 ALLOWANCES

A. Cost Included in Allowances:

1. Materials and equipment delivered at Site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts.

B. Labor to install only when Allowance includes installation.

C. Contractor’s Costs included in Contract Sum, Not in Allowance Sum:

1. Labor to install except where specifically included in allowance.

2. Costs for unloading and handling at Site, Labor, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance.

D. Protection from elements and from damage.

E. Other expenses required to complete installation.

1.07 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWANCES

A. Architect’s Duties: Consult with Contractor in consideration of products and suppliers or installers.

B. Make selection in consultation with CUSD.

1. Transmit CUSD’s decision to Contractor.

2. Prepare Change Orders.

C. Contractor’s Duties:

1. Assist Architect and CUSD in determining qualified suppliers or installers.

2. Obtain proposals from supplier and installers when requested by Architect.

3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect.

4. Notify Architect promptly of:

a. Reasonably objections Contractor may have against supplier; or party under consideration for installation.

b. Effect on construction schedule anticipated by selection under consideration.

1.08 CONTRACTOR REPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION

A. Purchase: On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples, as required.

B. Delivery: Make arrangements for delivery. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects. Submit claims for transportation damage.

C. Installation: Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced Specification Sections.



1.09 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS

A. Adjustment: Should net cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order for each school.

1.10 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. The Base Bid is to include an allowance of five thousand dollars ($5,000) for such additional work items not contained within the Construction Documents, but required to provide a complete project as intended by the District. Use of this allowance is at the sole discretion of the District, and must be authorized in advance by the District or its designated Construction Manager in advance of its use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


SUBMITTALS 01300-1

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including;

1. Contractor's Progress Schedule.

2. Submittal schedule.

3. Daily construction reports.

4. Shop Drawings.

5. Product Data.

6. Samples.

7. List of products.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for

requirements for administrative submittals, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Applications for payment.

2. Cost Breakdown

3. Bonds and Insurance Certificates.

4. List of Subcontractors.


D. Inspection and test reports are included in Section 01400.

E. Requirements for Project Record Documents and warranties are specified in Section 01700 and 01740.

F. Comply also with submittal requirements in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. No time extension will be authorized because of Contractor's failure to transmit submittals to Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work.


SUBMITTALS 01300-2

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals

and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. Advise Architect on each submittal as to whether processing time is critical to the progress of the Work.

C. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. Identify changes made

since previous submittal.

1. The cost for resubmittal after a second submittal shall be borne by the Contractor. Such costs shall include but not be limited to: the Architect's cost, the cost of the Architect's consultants' time, and the cost for delay of the Work.

D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for

identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block and provide information for proper processing. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet and detail number, and schedule and sheet number of the Contract Documents.

E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

1. Transmit each submittal through Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Provide a

separate transmittal for each individual submittal.

2. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.

3. On the transmittal record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Contractor shall include certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.

4. Transmittal Form: Architect will furnish form.

F. Do not fabricate products or begin Work which requires submittals until return of submittal with

Architect's review. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type schedule. Submit within 10 days after award of Contract.

1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous

vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Cost Breakdown."

2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 5 percent increments.

As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.


SUBMITTALS 01300-3

3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other

reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.

4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.

5. Coordinate the Contractor's Progress Schedule with the Cost Breakdown, list of

subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.

6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Completion. Indicate

Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Completion.

B. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including submittal review, testing, and installation.

C. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment

procedures.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, District, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

E. Updating: Revise schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been

recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule with the report for each meeting. 1.05 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Progress Schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 15 days after the award of Contract.

1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Cost Breakdown, and the list of

products as well as the Progress Schedule.

2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; provide the following information:

a. Date for each submittal, Project Manual Section, name of Installer, description of the Work covered, scheduled date for resubmittal, and scheduled date for Architect's final release.

3. The Submittal Schedule shall set a time of 60 days for the deadline for the last submittal to

the Architect, but in no case less than 30 days prior to the required installation of an item.


SUBMITTALS 01300-4

B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, District, separate contractors, Installers, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

1.06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies at weekly intervals:

List of Installers at the site. Approximate count of personnel at the site. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. Accidents and unusual events. Meetings and significant decisions. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of governing authorities. Change Orders received, implemented. Services connected, disconnected. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. Partial Completions, occupancies. Completions authorized. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Contractor.

B. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.

C. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, fabrication and installation drawings, setting

diagrams, design mix formulas, Contractor design calculations, schedules, patterns, templates, coordination drawings, and similar drawings.

1. Initial Submittal: Unless specified otherwise, submit one reproducible and two blue- or

black-line prints for the Architect's review.

2. Final Submittal: Submit number of copies required by Contractor plus 6 blue- or black-line prints; submit 8 prints where required for maintenance manuals. Three prints will be retained; the remainder, including those required for maintenance manuals, will be returned.

3. One of the prints returned shall be marked-up and maintained as a "Record Document" by

the Contractor.

D. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.


SUBMITTALS 01300-5

1.08 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Product Data through the Contractor.

B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring dia-grams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."

1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data

includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information, referenced to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics, and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances.

2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents

has been confirmed.

3. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete information not applicable.

C. Submittals: Unless specified otherwise, submit 6 copies of each required submittal; submit 8

copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain three, and will return the others, including those required for maintenance manuals, marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.

1. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may

serve as the final submittal.

D. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal bearing Architect's stamp to Installers, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities.

1. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data is in the Installer's

possession.

2. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.09 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples through the Contractor.

B. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.

1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities

indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample.

C. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.


SUBMITTALS 01300-6

1. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations.

D. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 5 sets; three will be returned marked with the action taken.

E. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout

the course of construction.

1. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal.

F. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to manufacturers, fabricators,

suppliers, Installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1.10 LIST OF PRODUCTS

A. Within 15 days of Award of Contract, submit a list of all products to be used. The list shall include the following:

1. Specifications Section number.

2. Product name or type.

3. Model number.

4. Manufacturer.

5. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.

1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.

1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility

B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action

stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE – BAR CHART 01320-1

SECTION 01320

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE – BAR CHART

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Construction Schedule procedures, preparation, submittal, updates, and revisions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01300 or 01302: Submittals.

B. Section 01720: Project Record Documents 1.03 PROCEDURES

A. Within 60 calendar days after Award of Contract, but not more than 30 days after date of Notice to Proceed, or as determined by the District Project Manager, Contractor shall submit, for review, to the District Project Manager, a detailed Construction Schedule setting forth all requirements for complete execution of work.

B. Fourteen calendar days after receipt of the District Project Manager’s review comments,

submit a final Construction Schedule acceptable to the District.

C. Include in initial schedule a written summary narrative sufficiently comprehensive to explain basis of Contractor’s approach to work.

D. If a Construction Schedule is considered by the District Project Manager to be in non-

compliance with any requirement of the Contract, Contractor will be notified to review and revise the Construction Schedule and bring it into compliance. Failure of Contractor to submit a Construction Schedule in full compliance with the Contract may result in evaluating progress for payment approval.

E. Simultaneously with each submittal of Progress Payment Request, Contractor shall deliver to

the District Project Manager and updated Construction Schedule reflecting work progress as of the end of previous reporting period. Each such Construction Schedule shall indicate actual progress to date in execution of work, together wit a projected schedule for completion of work.

F. All scheduled submittals are subject to review and acceptance by the District. The District

retains the right to withhold progress payments until Contractor submits a Construction Schedule acceptable to the District Project Manager.

G. Concurrent with the District’s acceptance of Contractor’s submitted Construction Schedule,

shall be Contractor’s signature of acceptance.



1.04 GUIDELINES

A. Work of this Contract shall be scheduled and progress monitored using a bar chart, although any of the CPM network type scheduling systems, including precedence diagramming or arrow are acceptable. Scheduling system shall be broken into sub-activities which shall, as a minimum, include major suppliers, all approvals, major trades of plumbing, mechanical, electrical, security, fire, and elevators/escalators. Scheduling system shall indicate all inter-relationships between trades and suppliers.

B. Level of detail indicated in schedule shall be equal to or greater than that provided by Table

of Contents of Contract Technical Specifications, including and addenda. Duration and events indicated on schedule shall conform, if applicable, to phasing set forth in the Contract and shall show any area or building within a particular phase. Schedule shall indicate any and all Contract “milestone events” and other milestones agreed to by the District, but no other manually - imposed dates will be accepted unless approved.

C. Construction Schedule shall represent a practical plan to complete work within time

requirements of the Contract.

1. A schedule extending beyond Contract time or less than Contract time will not be acceptable.

2. A schedule found unacceptable by the District shall be revised by Contractor and

resubmitted.

D. Construction schedule shall clearly indicate sequence of construction activities, grouped by applicable phase and sorted by areas, buildings, or facilities within phase, and shall specifically indicate:

1. Start and completion of all items of work, their major components, and interim milestone

completion dates, as determined by Contractor and the District.

2. Activities for procurement, delivery, installation of equipment, materials, and other supplies, including:

a. Time for submittals, re-submittals, and reviews. Include decision dates for selection

of finishes, if applicable.

b. Time for fabrication, and delivery of, manufactured products for work.

c. Interdependence of procurement and construction activities.

d. As applicable, dates for testing, balancing equipment, and final inspection.

E. Schedule shall be in sufficient detail to assure adequate planning and execution of work.

1. Each activity shall range in duration from 1 to 15 workdays and shall be total of actual days required for completion, and shall not include consideration of weather impact on completion of that activity.

2. Schedule shall be suitable, in judgment of the District Project Manager, to allow

monitoring and evaluating of progress in performance of work; it shall be calendar time scaled and, at a minimum, in a Bar Chart format.



3 Activities shall include:

a. Description; what is to be accomplished and where.

b. Workday duration.

c. Scheduled activities shall indicate continuous flow, from left to right.

4. Identify days per week and shifts per day worked; also, non-work days and holidays.

F. Failure to include any element of work required for performance of this Contract shall not

excuse Contractor from completing work required to comply with the Contract Documents, notwithstanding acceptance of Construction Schedule.

G. Submittal of Construction Schedule shall be understood to be Contractor’s confirmation that

the schedule meets requirements of the Contract Documents, and that work will be executed in sequence indicated in schedule.

1.05 REVIEWS, UPDATES, AND REVISIONS

A. The District Project Manager will review and return Contractor’s Construction Schedule, with summary comments, within 14 calendar days. If revisions are required, Contractor shall resubmit Schedule within 14 calendar days following receipt of the District’s comments.

B. After Contractor and the District agree to a final schedule, it will become the Project

Construction Schedule and considered part of the Contract Documents. No changes to Schedule will be allowed unless mutually agreed upon with the District Project Manager.

C. Contractor shall analyze and update the Construction Schedule:

1. As part of monthly payment application, Contractor shall submit to and participate with the District in a schedule review to include:

a. Actual completion dates for work items completed during report period.

b. Actual start dates for work items completed during report period.

c. Estimated remaining duration for work items in progress, which will not exceed

original duration for activity.

d. Estimated start dates for work items scheduled to start during month following report period, if applicable.

e. Changes in duration of work items.

2. In case of a change to Contractor’s planned sequence of work, Contractor shall include a

narrative report with updated progress scheduled which shall include, but not be limited to, a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors, and any proposed revisions for a recover plan.

3. All change orders affecting this schedule shall be clearly identified as a separate and new

activity.

4. Review of Construction Schedule will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for accomplishing all work in accordance with the Contract Documents.



D. Updates: The Contractor shall submit to the District Project manager, with each payment

application, an up-to-date Construction Schedule to include following:

1. Work Item Report: Detailing work items and dependencies as indicated on Bar Chart.

2. Separate listing of activities completed during reporting period.

3. Separate listing of activities which are currently in progress, indicting their remaining duration and percentages completed.

4. Separate listing of activities which are causing delay in work progress.

5. Narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact o Construction

Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors.

6. Resolution of conflict between actual work progress and schedule logic: When out-of-

sequence activities develop in the Schedule because of actual construction progress, Contractor shall submit a revised schedule to conform to current job sequence and direction.

E. If, according to current updated Construction Schedule, the District determines Contractor is

behind the Contract completion date or any interim milestone completion dates, considering all time extensions to which Contractor is entitled, Contractor shall submit a revised schedule, showing a workable plan and a narrative description to complete project on time. See Article 1.04, Paragraph C-2.

1. The District may withhold progress payments until a revised schedule, acceptable to the

District Project Manager, is submitted by Contractor.

F. Scheduling of change or extra work orders is responsibility of Contractor.

1 Contractor shall revise Construction Schedule to incorporate all activities involved in completing change orders to extra work orders and submit it to the District for review.

G. If the District finds Contractor is entitled to extension of any completion date, under provisions

of the Contract, the District Project Manager’s determination of total number of days extension will be based upon current analysis of Construction Schedule, and upon data relevant to extension.

H. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays to non-critical activities will not be

considered a basis for a time extension unless activities become critical. Non-critical activities are those activities which, when delayed, do not affect an interim of final Contract completion date.

I. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the District Project Manager not

more than 7 days after commencement of delay; otherwise, it shall be deemed finally waived for all purposes. Contractor shall provide an estimate of probable effect of such delay on progress of work as part of claim.

J. Weather Delays: Reference: The General Conditions.



1.06 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Noting in these requirements shall be deemed to be an usurpation of Contractor’s authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as Contractor sees fit, subject to all other requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall provide at all times sufficient competent labor, material, and equipment to

properly carry on work and to insure completion of each part in accordance wit Construction Schedule and within time agreed.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all submittals to the District are accurate and

consistent. Damage, including extra time and cost, caused by inaccuracies from Contractor will be compensated by Contractor.

1.07 SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS

A. Initial Submittal: The District has the right to withhold progress payments until Construction Schedule is accepted by the District Project Manager.

B. Update Submittals: The District has the right to withhold progress payments if Contractor fails

to update and submit Construction Schedule and reports as required by the District. 1.08 RECORD COPY

A At completion of work items, submit Construction Schedule reflecting “as-built” sequence. 1.09 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. All Construction Schedule submittals shall be transmitted with a Letter of Transmittal and shall include 6 copies and one reproducible copy.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION


ALTERATION & HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

01350-1

SECTION 01350

ALTERATION AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative, procedural, and technical requirements for alterations to existing construction and for matching new construction to the existing.


1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching".

2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition".

C. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements.

1.03 ALTERATIONS

A. Verification of Existing Conditions:

1. Conduct an examination of the building and site in conformance with, and as required by, the General Conditions.

2. Before beginning Work, verify, at the site, conditions affecting the Work. Obtain accurate

field dimensions of related areas, spaces, openings, levels, and items of adjacent constructions.

a. At doors and windows, verify existing sizes of openings and frames. Fabricate new

doors, frames, and windows to fit existing openings.

B. Surrounding Site Condition and Existing Building Condition Survey:

1. Prior to commencing the Work the Contractor shall tour the site and buildings and submit video or photo survey as specified in Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition".

C. Work of the Contract Documents requires demolition and removal of certain designated existing

walls and ceilings in which there are located electrical conduits, piping, or other similar equipment. This equipment shall be properly cut, stubbed-off, re-routed, or otherwise modified as necessary or as directed.

1. The cost of removal of equipment, conduits, and piping that could be reasonably

anticipated or expected in the removed constructions shall be included in the Contract Price.

2. Only the cost of removing equipment, conduits, and piping that could not be reasonably

anticipated upon inspection or examination of the existing constructions will be authorized for extra cost by a Change Order.



01350-2

D. Protect portions of existing structure where existing materials are to be demolished or removed, and where construction is to be performed. Provide temporary protection such that interior of existing structure will at all times be protected from weather inclemency. Protect temporary openings in exterior surfaces by temporary weatherproof closures. The Contractor will be held responsible for damage to existing structure and contents by reason of insufficiency of such protection.

E. Where alterations occur, or where new construction joins existing materials, adjacent existing

materials shall be cut, removed, patched, repaired or refinished and left in as good condition as existed before commencing Work. Materials and workmanship employed in alterations involving new construction, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall conform to that of original materials. Comply with requirements of Section 01045 "Cutting and Patching".

1. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition.

Patched Work shall match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.

2. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division, as approved by the Architect.

3. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls,

and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

4. Match existing products and Work for patching and extending Work.

5. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

6. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified

condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes.

7. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

8. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes and refinish trimmed areas.

9. Where the removal of materials leaves residue on substrates, such as adhesive behind

rubber/vinyl wall base, remove all such residue that interferes physically or aesthetically with new materials and Work.

F. Due to the difficulty of anticipating every unsatisfactory condition that might exist in connection

with existing work where alteration or reconstruction Work is proposed, it shall be the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to reconstruct school buildings in accordance with Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Should any conditions develop wherein the finished Work shall not comply with said Title 24, California Code of Regulations, a change order detailing and specifying the required Work shall be submitted to the Architect for approval by the Office of the State Architect.

1.04 UTILITIES

A. Before starting Work relating to existing utilities (electrical, sewer, water, heat, gas, alarms, etc.) affecting any other building or system, the Contractor will be required to give 5 working days notice to the Architect and District and obtain approval in writing before proceeding with this phase of the Work.



01350-3

B. Exercise special care to avoid damaging and to maintain in operation, all existing site utility runs

as required for District's operations during the construction period. Also avoid damaging existing piping, conduits, or equipment that is to remain in the building, whether or not specifically indicated on the Drawings. Existing utilities, piping, conduit, and equipment may or may not be shown on the Drawings. The Drawings only reflect print information intended to suggest the probable extent and possible location of indicated runs and equipment. There may be other runs. There may be other locations. Neither the District nor the Architect represents that either has any precise knowledge as to either the full extent or exact location of runs and equipment that may fall within the building or Project site. Execute demolition and excavation on the site and in the building with extreme care (by hand or small tools wherever appropriate) and at the sole risk of the Contractor and the workers involved.

1. Locate all known existing installations before proceeding with construction operations which

may cause damage to such installations. The existing installations shall be kept in service where possible and damage to them shall be repaired at no increases in Contract Price.

C. If and when it should be necessary to impact the day-to-day operations of District's operations

in order to pursue the Work, furnish 5 days notice and coordinate the means and timing to avoid, minimize, or circumvent such impacts. The District reserves the right to assess and anticipate such impacts and the right to stop or postpone the Work until a mutually satisfactory time and means can be agreed upon.

D. The Contractor shall locate all water, gas, sewer, electrical, and telephone services indicated on

the Drawings and verified by the various companies as applicable, or which may be inferred by the presence of visible facilities such as buildings, meter junction boxes, drain inlets, irrigation outlets, etc., on or adjacent to the site of construction. Contractor shall carefully review such information and shall undertake such further investigations and studies as may be necessary to determine subsurface and other conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to protect from all damage, all utilities, including but not limited to pull boxes, valve boxes, and valves. Costs for repair of any such damage shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.05 IMPACT TOOLS

A. Use of impact tools is not permitted on concrete block masonry unless specifically allowed by the Architect. Obtain approval before using impact tools.

1.06 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

A. In the event Contractor encounters on the Project site material reasonably believed to be asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or other hazardous materials which have not been rendered harmless, Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and within 24 hours report the condition to the District and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the District and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials and has not been rendered harmless. Upon written notice to Contractor, the Contractor shall within 24 hours resume the Work in the affected area in the absence of asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous material, or when such materials have been rendered harmless.

B. Continue the Work in other locations not subject to possible contamination.

C. Maintain accurate records of delays and extra labor and materials, if any, caused by

encountering the suspected hazardous material.

1. Submit such records daily to Architect, or at such other time interval as directed.



01350-4

1.07 LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS

A. The District has not performed testing nor made a survey to determine the presence of lead-containing materials existing in the buildings. The proper treatment, preparation, and disposal of lead-containing materials is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. The Contractor shall comply with applicable local, State, and federal regulations regarding lead-

containing materials.

C. Where lead-containing materials are present, provide the following practices and such others as necessary to meet applicable regulations:

1. Training of workers.

2. Preparing Work areas for containment of debris.

3. Posting of signs.

4. Erecting barriers.

5. Performing Work only under appropriate weather and wind conditions.

6. Disposal of debris and other contaminated materials.

7. Providing protective equipment for workers.

8. Using wet sanding or wet scraping where necessary.

9. Monitoring air conditions.

10. Providing compliance plans, blood lead analysis of workers, and decontamination

procedures.

D. Do not perform activities prohibited by applicable regulations, such as the use of: machine grinding or sanding without approved HEPA vacuum tool; heat guns; dry scraping or sanding; and the use of prohibited paint strippers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work.

B. Beginning of restoration or new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations Work; replace and restore at completion.

B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and

deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished Work.

C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.



01350-5

D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new Work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to original condition.

B. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified

condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes.

C. Install products and finishes as specified in individual Sections.

END OF SECTION


QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-1

SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.

B. Quality control services include inspections, tests and related actions, including reports performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.

C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not

production of standard products.

1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities.

E. Inspections, test and related actions specified do not limit the Contractor's quality control pro-

cedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

F. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, District, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

G. Refer also to Article 50 of the General Conditions.

1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, the Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by governing authorities. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

B. District Responsibilities: The District will provide inspections, tests and similar quality control

services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services are not included in the Contract Price.

1. The District will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing

laboratory or other qualified firm approved by the DSA to perform services which are the District's responsibilities.

2. Types of tests and inspections paid for by District are soils testing, concrete and mortar

testing, special inspections if any, and on-site welding inspection.



C. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests or other quality control services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the cost of the original test was the Contractor's responsibility.

1. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's

responsibility, where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required

inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:

1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to

facilitate inspections and tests.

2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples.

3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing

laboratories.

4. Providing the Architect and agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

E. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate

required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples

and similar activities, but the testing agency is not limited only to the Contractor's scheduled times for conducting its activities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, 3 copies, unless the Contractor is responsible for the service. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service through the Contractor, in duplicate.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the

authority so directs. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.



1. Each independent inspection and testing agency and inspector engaged on the Project shall be approved and authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State and in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching".

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired

construction.

C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.

3.02 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Test the following in accordance with Title 24, Part 2 (CBC), 1998 Edition.

1. Lumber and Plywood: Article 2304.1. 2. Portland Cement: Articles 1903A.2 and 1929A.1. 3. Concrete Aggregates: Article 1903A.3. 4. Reinforcing Bars: Articles 1903A.5 and 1929A.2. 5. Waiver of Batch Plant Inspection: Articles 1929A.5 and 1929A.6. 6. Proportions of Concrete: Articles 1904A and 1905A.1, A.2, A.3, A.4 and A.5. 7. Strength Tests of Concrete: Article 1905A.6. 8. Job Site Inspection: Article 1905A.7. 9. Batch Plant or Weighmaster Inspection: Article 1929A.4.

END OF SECTION


TESTING AND INSPECTION 01405-1

SECTION 01405

TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide testing and inspection services to meet requirements of the California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Parts 1 and 2. 2007 Edition


A. Document 00700: General Conditions.

B. Document 00800: Supplementary Conditions.

C. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 1.03 TESTS

A. The District will select an independent testing laboratory to conduct tests. Selection of material required to be tested shall be by the laboratory or the District's representative and not by Contractor.

B. Contractor shall notify the District's representative a sufficient time in advance of the

manufacture of material to be supplied by him under the Contract Documents, which must be in terms of the Contract, be tested, in order that the District may arrange for testing at the source of supply.

C. Any material shipped by Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily

passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated into the work.

D. The District will select and pay testing laboratory costs for all tests and inspections, but may

be reimbursed by Contractor for such costs under the terms of the Contract Documents. 1.04 TEST REPORTS

A. One copy of test reports shall be forwarded to the Division of the State Architect by the testing agency. Such reports shall include all tests made, regardless of whether such tests indicate that the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be reported. Records of special sampling operations as required shall also be reported. Reports shall show that material or materials were sampled and tested in accordance with requirements of CBC, Title 24, Parts 1 and 2 20018 Edition and with the approved Specifications. Test reports shall show specified design strength. They shall also state definitely whether or not material or materials tested comply with requirements.



1.05 VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS

A. Each testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect a verified report in duplicate covering tests which are required to be made by that agency during progress of project. Such report shall be furnished each time that work on the project is suspended, covering tests up to that time, and at completion of the project, covering all tests.

1.06 INSPECTION BY THE DISTRICT

A. The District and its representatives shall at all times have access, for purpose of inspection, to all parts of the work and to shops wherein the work is in preparation, and Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection.

B. The District shall have the right to reject materials and workmanship which are defective, or

to require their correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected, rejected materials shall be removed from the premises without charge to the District. If Contractor does not correct such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the District may correct same and charge the expenses to Contractor.

C. Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the District, at any time before final

acceptance of the entire work, to make an examination of the work already completed, by removing or tearing out the same, Contractor shall on request promptly furnish necessary facilities, labor and materials.

D. If such work is found to be defective in any respect due to fault of Contractor or his

subcontractor, he shall defray all expenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the additional cost of labor and material necessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be allowed Contractor.

1.07 DISTRICT INSPECTOR

A. The District Inspector is employed by the District in accordance with requirements of the California Building Code (CBC) and his duties are specifically defined therein.

B. The work of construction in all stages of progress shall be subject to the personal continuous

observation of the Inspector. He shall have free access to any and all parts of the work at any time. Contractor shall furnish the Inspector reasonable facilities for obtaining such information as may be necessary to keep him fully informed respecting progress and manner of the work and character of materials.

C. Inspection of the work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.

1.08 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS (CBC 2007)

A. Concrete - CBC, Chapter 19A:

1. Materials:

a. Test of Materials 1903A.1

b. Portland Cement Tests 1903A.2, 1929



c. Concrete Aggregate 1903A.3

d. Shotcrete Aggregate 1903A.3

e. Reinforcing Bars 1903A.5.1; 1903A.5.2; 1903A.5.3; 1903A.5.4;

f. Prestressing Steel & Anchorage 1903A.5.5;

g. Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or tubing 1903A.5.6

h. Admixtures 1903A.6

2. Quality:

a. Proportions of Concrete 1905A.1; 1905A.2; 1905A.3; 1905A.4; 1905A.5; 1905A.6,

b. Mixing and Placing 1905A.1.1; 1905A.1.2; 1905A.1.3

c. Concrete Testing 1905A.6;

d. Test Of Shotcrete 1905A.6; 1924A.10

e. Composite Construction Cores 1929A.8

f. Gypsum Concrete Strength Tests 1925A.1; 1929A.13

g. Insulating Concrete Tests DSA IR 27-1

3. Inspection:

a. Job Site Inspection 1905A.7.1

b. Batch Plant or Weighmaster Inspection 1929A.4, 1929A.5; 1929A.6

c. Prestressed Concrete Inspection 1929A.9

d. Shotcrete Inspection 929A.10

e. Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection 1929A.12, 1903A.10

B. Steel - CBC, Chapter 22A:

1. Materials:

a. Structural Steel, Cold Formed Steel 2202A.1; 2205A.4

b. Material Identification 2203.4

2. Inspection and Tests:

a. Test of Structural & Cold Formed Steel 2213A

b. Tests of High Strength Bolts, 2231A.2 Nuts, and Washers



c. Tests of End Welded Studs 2231A.3

d. Shop Fabrication Inspection 2231A.4

e. Welding Inspection 231A.5

f. High Strength Bolt Inspection 2231A.6

g. Steel Joist Load Tests 2231A.7

C. Wood - CBC, Chapter 23A:

1. Materials:

a. Lumber and Plywood Grading 2303A.1, 2304A

b. Glue - Laminated Members 2303A.2, 2304A

2. Inspection:

a. Glue - Laminated Fabrication 2337A.1

b. Timber Connectors 2337A.2

c. Manufactured Trusses 2337A.3

D. Exterior Wall Coverings - CBC, Chapter 14A, 25A:

1. Materials:

a. Portland Cement Plaster 2508A, 2509A, 2510A

2. Inspection:

a. Veneer Inspection 1405A PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

01421-1

SECTION 01421




1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used to help locate the reference. Location is not limited.

C. Directed: Terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved",

"required", and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.

D. Approved: The term "approved", where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the

Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the responsibilities and duties of the Architect as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

E. Regulations: The term "regulations" includes laws, statutes, ordinances, and lawful orders

issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. Furnish: The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,

unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. Install: The term "install" describes operations at Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, temporary storage, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

H. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended

use.

I. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor or contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

1. Unless otherwise specified, the term "experienced", when used with the term Installer,

means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Trades: Use of terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,



01421-2

such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

J. Project site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities,

either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other construction activities as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings.

K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific

inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on, and, if required, to interpret, results of those inspections or tests.

L. District's Representative: Where the term "District's Representative" is used, it shall also mean

the Architect.

M. Where the term "Owner" is used, it shall mean the District. 1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, comply

with standard in effect as of date of The Notice to Contractors Calling for Bids.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels comply with the most stringent. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be

familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity,

the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable code requirements of all regulatory agencies, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Federal and California Occupational Safety and Health Administrations.

2. California Code of Regulations (CCR), including Titles 8, 17, 19, 23, 24, 25 and 26, and

1998 California Building Code.

3. Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition, and 1998 California amendments.



01421-3

4. Uniform Mechanical Code, 1997 Edition, and 1998 California amendments.

5. Uniform Plumbing Code, 1997 Edition, and 1998 California amendments.

6. National Electrical Code, 1997 Edition, and 1998 California amendments.

7. Federal Americans With Disabilities Act, Title III.

8. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 13.

10. Local Air Pollution Control District.

11. County Health Department.

12. Uniform Fire Code, 1994 Edition, and 1995 California amendments.

13. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 72, 1993, Ref. 3503 CBC, Local Alarm

Systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the District's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.


END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS

01500-1

SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Water service and distribution. Tie onto existing systems as necessary.

2. Temporary electric, gas, power, and light. Tie onto existing systems as necessary.

3. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Use existing system if feasible; if not, provide heat and

ventilation as necessary.

4. Telephone and fax service.

5. Drinking Water. Existing facilities may be used to the extent feasible during construction. If not feasible provide portable facilities.

6. Storm and sanitary sewer. Tie onto existing system as necessary.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Field offices.

2. Dewatering facilities and drains.

3. Temporary enclosures.

4. Hoists.

5. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.

6. Waste disposal services.

7. Rodent and pest control.

8. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

9. Parking areas for workers.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Temporary fire protection.



01500-2

2. Barricades’, warning signs, and lights.

3. Enclosure fence for portions of the site when and where necessary.

4. Environmental protection.

E. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for protection of trees and vegetation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit and obtain approval of methods and schedules for connecting or disconnecting existing systems that affect occupancy of the building and site during construction.

B. Submit meter readings at beginning and end of construction for the use of water, power, and

gas.

1. Contractor will be charged by the District for the use of utilities during construction.

2. Usage will be based upon the following:

a. Total usage during periods that only construction personnel are at the site.

b. Additional incremental usage during periods that construction personnel and the District's employees or students are on the site.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Comply with California Fire Code Articles 4, 9 and 87 for safety of welding operations during construction.

C. Establish and maintain fire access roads or ways per Article 10, Division II, of the California Fire

Code.

D. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."



01500-3

E. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the District, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.

Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.


A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. For signs and directory boards provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form

overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.

C. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood, properly supported and braced.

D. Paint: For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over

exterior primer.

E. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins.

F. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.

B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses

100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of

110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where

exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.



01500-4

E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for

adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

F. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for

temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size

required by location and class of fire exposure. 2.03 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR (IF REQUIRED)

A. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes.

1. Construction Manager's Field Office: Type as necessary for Contractor's operations,

including a meeting room large enough to accommodate 12 persons.

2. Inspector's Field Office: One office of at least 75 sq.ft., complete with the equipment specified in the General Conditions.

B. Temporary Toilet Units: When permanent facilities are not available, self-contained, single-

occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type shall be provided. Units shall be properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary

offices and similar spaces will be provided, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.

1. Fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification,

extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.

D. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chain link fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for corner posts.

E. Water Service: If necessary, install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures

adequate for construction.

F. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.

G. Temporary Telephones: Provide dedicated telephone line and fax machine in the field office of

the Contractor.

H. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare a 4 foot by 8 foot Project identification sign. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics which will be furnished by Architect. Submit sign design to Architect for approval.



01500-5

I. Enclosure Fence: For each phase or sequence of the Work, the District will provide adequate fencing to protect District's employees, students, and the public, installed where indicated, including adequate, lockable gates.

J. Collection and Disposal of Waste: The District shall provide adequate waste disposal

dumpsters, meeting the requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Combustible waste shall not be held more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials shall be handled separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Waste materials shall be lawfully disposed of.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as

required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary as necessary. When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching.

B. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide temporary heat and ventilation required by

construction activities for curing or drying if necessary.

C. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities.

D. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for

personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition.

1. If required by authorities, Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities

for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel.

E. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper supply or other approved supply.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access and where approved by Architect and District.

1. Maintain support facilities until near Completion. Remove prior to Completion.

B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water.

Comply with applicable Division 2 Sections.



01500-6

C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.

1. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing,

wood-framed construction.

D. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: If necessary, provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees.

E. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily.

Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

F. Parking for Workers' Vehicles: A parking area for construction personnel is indicated on

Drawings or will be designated by the District. Personnel and workers may park only in the designated area.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect.

B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,

install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."

1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not

less than one extinguisher in each area of building.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition.

C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for

erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

E. Excavation Protections: Where trenches or excavations must be left unattended, provide

fencing, structurally adequate covers, barricades, and warning devices.



01500-7

F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed

areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for

theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove

each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. At Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period.

Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout".

END OF SECTION


MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

SECTION 01600

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.


1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of

industry standards to products specified.

2. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

3. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies the requirements for a list of all products to be

used. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

2. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make

or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

B. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise

fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.


A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or

more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.



C. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

D. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or

power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data:

Name of product and manufacturer. Model and serial number. Capacity. Speed. Ratings. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of

construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure or in the structure in a manner that

will not endanger the supporting construction.

7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices

and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.



B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:

1. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the

term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

2. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or

assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

3. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with

performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

4. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require

compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.

5. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the

Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category.

6. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "as selected" or

"as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures...", or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

C. When a named manufacturer and named product is specified, based upon a manufacturer's

statements in advertising information or in product data that the product complies with applicable codes or standards, and it is later determined that the product does not comply, then a substitution shall be provided without extra cost to the District.

1. The District and Architect have the right to rely on the manufacturer's advertising

information and product data.

2. If a substitution is required, comply with Division 1 Section "Substitutions". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Secure against seismic forces.

B. Require each Installer to inspect substrate and conditions under which installation is to be

performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.



D. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work

to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for approval.

E. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.

F. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

G. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at

standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.

H. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and

deterioration at time of Completion.

END OF SECTION


SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-1

SECTION 01631

SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.


1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of

industry standards to products specified.

2. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options.

3. Substitution requirements in the General Conditions.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction

required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period or after the bid period, and accepted by

Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the District, or Architect.

3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents.

4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within fifteen (15) days after award of Contract. Requests received more than 15 days after Contract award will not be considered.



1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration, including request form at end of this Section. Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for change-order proposals.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request.

Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by the District and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect.

c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

d. Samples, where applicable or requested.

e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Progress Schedule compared to the Schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Price.

g. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements

in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.

h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

B. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order if the substitution is accepted by the District.

1. Use the product specified if a decision is not made on the use of a proposed substitute

within the time allocated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.



1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. The contractor may be required to compensate the Architect for redesign and evaluation services.

2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents.

3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.

4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract

Documents.

6. The requested substitution offers the District a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the District must assume. The District's additional responsibilities may include increased cost of other construction by the District, and similar considerations.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a

governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials

and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or

Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650-1

SECTION 01650

STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES 1.1 Starting systems. 1.2 Demonstration and instructions. 1.3 Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.1 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedules for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. After start-up of HVAC, Suppression, Electrical, Fire Alarm system, run system continuously for

thirty (30) calendar days prior to project completion. C. Notify Owner's Project Manager seven (7) calendar days prior to start-up of each item. D. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage. E. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those

required by the equipment or system manufacturer. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or

Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

I. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been

properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.2 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to

date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct Owners' personnel using a qualified manufacturers'

representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time and at equipment location.


STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650-2

E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals (refer to Section 01730) when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

F. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that

specified in individual sections. PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 – EXECUTION - NOT APPLICABLE

END OF SECTION


CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following:

Inspection procedures. Project record document submittal. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. Submittal of warranties. Final cleaning.

B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.


1.03 COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Completion is

claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as complete.

a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing a final accounting of changes to the Contract Price.

b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value

of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

c. Submit final releases.

2. Advise the District of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit insurance certificates for products and completed operations if required.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the District unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Submit record documents, maintenance manuals, construction photographs and negatives,

damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.



6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.

7. Transmit lock keys to the District. Advise the District's personnel of changeover in security

provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the District's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.

11. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for final inspection, the Architect will either

proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is complete.

2. If more than two (2) inspections by Architect are required, the District will charge the

Contractor the cost of the additional inspection.

C. Upon completion, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Completion. 1.04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of

Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

variations in separate categories of the Work.

2. Mark new information that is important to the District but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.

3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.

4. Dimension to underground and concealed utilities from permanent structural features.

5. Prior to Completion, obtain from the Architect at Contractor's cost, a complete set of

transparencies and transfer to the transparencies all changed record drawing information. Submit both the blue- or black-line record information and transparencies to the Architect.



a. At Contractor's option, Contractor may pay Architect for cost of transferring record information to transparencies.

C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of

miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the District's records.

D. Maintenance Manuals: Provide three maintenance manuals of each item, equipment, or

system. Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

Emergency instructions. Spare parts list. Copies of warranties. Wiring diagrams. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. Inspection procedures. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Fixture lamping schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the District's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items:

Maintenance manuals. Record documents. Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants. Fuels. Identification systems. Control sequences. Hazards. Cleaning. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: Startup. Shutdown. Emergency operations. Noise and vibration adjustments. Safety procedures.



Economy and efficiency adjustments. Effective energy utilization. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Refer to the requirements in the General Conditions for additional cleaning requirements. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion.

a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.

b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free

of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and

other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other

foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of

the Work during construction.

D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the District's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become

the District's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the District.

END OF SECTION


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1

SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


A. Procedures for preparing accurate "Project Record Documents"(Specifications and Drawings).


A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.

B. Section 01300: Submittals.

C. Section 01320: Construction Schedule-Bar Chart. 1.03 PROCEDURES

A. Promptly following Contract Award, General Contractor shall secure from the District one complete set of Specifications and prints of the Contract Drawings and mark them as "Project Record Documents".

B. Timing Of Entries: Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and recording changes on "Project Record

Documents" set.

D. Do not use "Project Record Documents" set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the Architect/ Engineer and District Inspector. Maintain separate job sets for subcontractors and workers daily use.

E. Maintain "Project Record Documents" set at job site where designated by the

Architect/Engineer.

F. Use all means necessary to protect "Project Record Documents" set from deterioration, loss or damage until completion of work.

G. Making Entries On "Project Record Documents" Drawings: Using an erasable color pencil,

other than blue, not ink or indelible pencil, clearly describe change by note and by graphic line as required. Date entries. Call attention to entry by a "cloud" around area or areas affected. In event of overlapping changes, different colors may be used for each change.

1. Changes due to approved change orders may be indicated by referencing change order

number and scope of change in lieu of revising "Project Record Documents".

2. Location and depth below finish grade or above ceilings and attic spaces of utilities shall be fully dimensioned and indicated on "Project Record Documents". Dimensions shall be taken to building lines or permanent landmarks.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2

H. The Architect's approval of current status of "Project Record Documents" will be a prerequisite to the Architect's approval of requests for progress payments and request for final payment.

1. Progress Approvals: Prior to submitting each request for progress payments, secure the

District Inspector's approval of status of "Project Record Documents".

2. Prior to submitting request for final payment and final inspection, General Contractor shall submit "Project Record Documents" set to the District Inspector, with transmittal letter, in duplicate, for approval and further processing.

3. The General Contractor shall certify that the "Project Record Documents" are complete

and accurately reflect all changes or modifications to the original Construction Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


WARRANTIES 01740-1

SECTION 01740

WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.

1. Refer to requirements in the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's Guarantee of

the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies Contract closeout procedures.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to District are

specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.


D. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected

by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or

rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the District has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. District's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the District are in addition to implied

warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available


WARRANTIES 01740-2

under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the District can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

1. Rejection of Warranties: The District reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit

selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Warranties required in individual Specifications Sections are in addition to and not a

limitation of other rights the District may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty or similar commitment on the Work

or part of the Work, the District reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.

1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the District,

by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

B. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written

document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the District through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.

1. Refer to Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submittal of special warranties.

C. Form of Submittal: At Completion compile two copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered

loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper.

1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.

2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"

Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.

3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.


WARRANTIES 01740-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WARRANTY FORM

A. Provide warranties on the form included on the following pages. 3.02 LIST OF WARRANTIES

A. Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the following Sections and other Sections, if any, where required.

02520 – Site Concrete 02575 – AC Pavement Repair 03300 – Cast in Place Concrete 07560 – Roof Repair 08113 – Doors Frames 08210 – Wood Doors 08710 – Door Hardware 15010 – Mechanical and Plumbing Equipment 16010 – Electrical Equipment 16715 – Fire Alarm (Continued next page)


WARRANTIES 01740-4

CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY

Page 1 of 2 Date: Project Name: COMPTON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT IT DEPARTMENT IMPROVEMENTS IT Department (Name of Sitel) 500 S. Santa Fe Ave Compton, CA 90221 (Address of School) GUARANTEE FOR , in Agreement between (Specification Section) (Name of Product) __________________________________ and (the "District") (the "Contractor") (Name of Installer or Subcontractor or Manufacturer) hereby guarantees to the District that the portion of the Work described as follows: , which it has provided for the above referenced Project, is of good quality; free from defects; free from any liens, claims, and security interests; and has been completed in accordance with Specification Section ____________ and the other requirements of the Contract. The undersigned further agrees that, if at any time within (enter appropriate no.) months after the date hereof the undersigned receives notice from the District that the aforesaid portion of the Work is unsatisfactory, faulty, deficient, incomplete, or not in conformance with the requirements of the Contract, the undersigned will, within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of such notice, correct, repair, or replace such portion of the Work, together with any other parts of the Work and any other property which is damaged or destroyed as a result of such defective portion of the Work or the correction, repair, or replacement thereof; and that it shall diligently and continuously prosecute such correction, repair, or replacement to completion. In the event the undersigned fails to commence such correction, repair, or replacement within seven (7) calendar days after such notice, or to diligently and continuously prosecute the same to completion, the undersigned, collectively and separately, do hereby authorize the District to undertake such correction, repair, or replacement at the expense of the undersigned; and the Contractor will pay to the District promptly upon demand all costs and expenses incurred by the District in connection therewith. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the District may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.


WARRANTIES 01740-5

CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY

Page 2 of 2 SUBCONTRACTOR OR INSTALLER Signed Title Typed Name Name of Firm Contractor License Number Address Phone Number MANUFACTURER (If Applicable) Signed_____________________________ Title Typed Name Name of Firm Contractor License Number Address Phone Number GENERAL CONTRACTOR Signed_____________________________ Title Typed Name Name of Firm Contractor License Number Address Phone Number Make copies as required

END OF SECTION


DEMOLITION 02050-1

SECTION 02050

DEMOLITION

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for demolition, dismantling, cutting and alterations as indicated, specified, and required for completion of the Contract; for new construction, modernization and rehabilitation projects, as applicable. Following is a partial list:

1. Protecting existing work to remain.

2. Cleaning soiled materials that are to remain.

3. Disconnecting and capping utilities.

4. Removing debris and equipment.

5. Removal of items, as indicated on Drawings.

6. Salvageable items to be retained by the District.


A. Supplementary Conditions.

B. Section 01010: Summary of Work.

C. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

D. Divisions 15 and 16: Mechanical and Electrical. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Work of this Section shall be carefully performed by worker skilled in demolition of buildings, using appropriate tools and equipment, under supervision of a competent supervisor at all times.

1.04 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Drawings may not indicate in detail all demolition work to be carried out. Contractor shall carefully examine existing work to determine full extent of demolition required for completed work to conform to Drawings and Specifications.

B. Existing work damaged during demolition, shall be repaired or replaced to satisfaction of the

District Inspector at no extra cost to the District.

C. Contractor shall be solely responsible for damage resulting from inadequate or improper construction, shoring, bracing or support procedures.


DEMOLITION 02050-2

D. Notify the District Inspector immediately for further instructions, should materials, systems or conditions differ from those indicated on Drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Prior to commencement of work of this Section, contact the District Inspector to confirm that all items identified as District property have been removed or clearly marked.

B. Coordinate demolition with other trades to ensure correct sequence, limits, and methods of

proposed demolition. Schedule work to create least possible inconvenience to operation of the facility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HANDLING OF MATERIALS

A. All existing items to be reused or retained by the District shall be removed by the use of proper tools to insure against damage.

B. Salvaged items to be retained by the District and not incorporated into work shall be

delivered to the District Inspector cleaned, packaged and labeled, unless otherwise instructed.

C. Items to be reused shall be stored on site and protected from damage, soiling and theft.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Protection:

1. Do not begin demolition until safety partitions, chain link fence barricades, warning signs and other forms of protection are installed. Refer to Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Section 01502.

2. Provide all safeguards, including warning signs and lights, chain link fence barricades,

and the like, for protection of the students and public during demolition.

B. Noise, Dust And Water Control: Refer to Supplementary Conditions.

C. Safety: If at any time safety of existing construction appears to be endangered, Contractor shall take immediate measures to support such endangered construction; cease operations and immediately notify the Architect. Do not resume demolition until the Architect gives instructions.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. Do not throw materials from heights. Use ramps or chutes.

B. Remove existing construction only to extent necessary for proper installation of new construction and junction with existing work. Cut back finished surfaces to straight, plumb or level lines as required.


DEMOLITION 02050-3

C. Where openings are cut oversize or in improper location, replace the excess removed material as instructed by the Architect at no additional cost to the District.

3.03 CUTTING EXISTING CONCRETE

A. Cutting of existing concrete shall be done by experienced workers familiar with the requirements and space necessary for placing concrete. All cutting shall be done under the direct supervision of the General Contractor. In general, cutting of concrete shall be done with concrete cutting wheels and hand chisels. Care shall be taken not to shatter concrete that is to remain.

B. Extent of cutting of concrete shall be determined by figured dimensions on Drawings. Any

concrete removed in excess of amount indicated, specified or required, shall be replaced with concrete as directed by the Architect at expense of Contractor.

C. Prior to cutting or coring concrete, find the location of utilities that might be embedded

therein or in close proximity and take necessary measures to protect them. 3.04 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES

A. Contractor shall remove from building and site all existing plumbing and electrical equipment fixtures and services not indicated for reuse and not necessary for completion of work. Sub-contractors for mechanical and electrical work shall disconnect, and, when necessary, cap services to their portion of work prior to commencement of, or during work of, this Section.

3.05 REMOVAL OF OTHER MATERIALS

A. Masonry: Cut back to joint lines and remove old mortar without damaging units to remain. Allow space for repairs to backing where applicable.

B. Woodwork: Cut or remove to a joint or panel line. Undamaged, removed material, may be

reused.

C. Roofing: Remove as required, including roof insulation, flashing, and related items connected thereto. At penetrations through existing roofing, trim cut edges back to sound roofing with openings of minimum size necessary to receive new work.

D. Sheet metal: Remove back to joint, lap, or connection. Secure loose and unfastened ends

or edges and make watertight.

E. Glass: Remove broken or damaged glass and clean rebates and stops of setting materials.

F. Modular materials such as ceiling, resilient and ceramic tile: Remove to a natural joint with no damaged or defective unit remaining where joining new construction. After removing flooring materials, clean substrates of old cement and adhesive.

G. Gypsum board: Remove to a joint line on a support.

H. Plaster: Saw cut plaster on straight lines but leave a minimum of 2" of firmly attached metal

lath where tying to new lath/plaster.

I. Work not mentioned to be removed that interferes with new construction shall be cut to clean-cut lines to provide for proper interface with new construction, or patching and repair, as required.


DEMOLITION 02050-4

J. Existing facilities, equipment or work that is not indicated to be removed, but interferes with

new construction, shall be cut neatly and removed as required to facilitate installation of new work, and then replaced and finished as specified for new work.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean all existing materials to remain, using skilled experienced worker under continual supervision, and using appropriate tools and materials.

B. Protect adjacent materials and equipment during cleaning function.

C. Refer to other Specification Sections for further cleaning requirements.

3.07 PATCHING

A. Patch materials that are to remain when damaged by this work. Finish material and appearance of patch or repair work shall match existing contiguous materials and finishes in all respects, as approved by District Inspector.

3.08 CLEAN-UP/DISPOSAL

A. Parking trucks at building shall be coordinated with the District Inspector.

B. Debris shall be conveyed by trucks designed to transport rubbish and debris.

C. Debris shall be dampened by fog water spray when it is transported from its location to truck. Amount of water shall be controlled to insure against water pounding at area of debris pick-up.

D. Debris pick-up area shall be kept broom-clean and shall be flushed with clean water, when

necessary, to remove soil.

E. Debris, waste, and removed materials, other than items to be salvaged, are Contractor's property for legal disposal off site. Continuously clean-up and remove these items and do not allow to accumulate in building(s) or on site.

END OF SECTION


SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1

SECTION 02230

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Removal of vegetation.

2. Topsoil stripping.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

4. Removal of above-grade, on-grade, and below-grade improvements.

5. Fencing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SITE CLEARING

A. Remove above-grade, on-grade, and below-grade improvements indicated for removal.

B. General: Remove shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and disposal of stumps and roots.

1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

C. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system.

2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.

3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material.


SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2

D. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of shrubs, and other vegetation, as indicated on the drawings.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.

3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground, except comply with requirements of Section 02200 "Earthwork" as applicable.

3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning on Owner's property is not permitted.

B. Dispose of waste materials offsite in a legal manner.

3.03 FENCING

A. Existing fences scheduled to remain may be removed to facilitate the Work, provided they are installed to their original condition in accordance with requirements of Section 02821: Chain Link Fences and Gates.

B. Fencing indicated to be removed and not reinstalled shall be completely removed, including footings. Fill and compact excavations.

C. Install chain link fencing indicated to be relocated or reset in accordance with applicable requirements specified under Section 02821: Chain Link Fences and Gates.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project Site.

END OF SECTION


EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT 02316 - 1

SECTION 02316

EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.

B. Section Includes:

1. Excavating, backfill, and compacting for paved areas.

2. Installation of fill materials.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 02230: Site Clearing.

2. Section 02319: Base Course.

3. Section 02520: Site Concrete Work.

4. Section 02575: Pavement Repair.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Import and Export of Earth Materials:

1. Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.

2. Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.

3. Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Imported Soils: Submit initial product Sample for testing in accordance with the terms of sub-section 3.05 of this section.


A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein.

B. Sampling, testing, and certification of imported and/or exported soils shall be performed in accordance with Section 01440.


A. Information on Drawings or in soils report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.

B. A copy of the foundation investigation and soils report is available for examination at the Architect’s office during regular office hours of Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BASE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Slabs On Grade: Provide “Crushed Aggregate Base “ as specified in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 200: “Rock Materials,” with ¾ inch maximum size aggregates. Provide 3 inch thick base, unless noted otherwise.

B. Bituminous Surfacing: As indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 02319 - Base Course.

2.02 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Fill and backfill materials shall be previously excavated materials or imported fill material, free of clods and stones larger than 3 inches, foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod, expansive soils, rubbish and debris. Material shall conform to these specified requirements and related sections.

B. Fill material exhibiting a wide variation in consistency and/or moisture content shall be blended to stabilize and upgrade the material.

C. Imported Fill Material:

1. Provide suitable materials obtained from Project site excavations for earthwork and fill materials. If excavated materials are not of suitable quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary.

2. Imported fill shall be a granular material with sufficient binder to form a firm and stable unyielding subgrade and shall not have more than 60 percent of fines passing 200 mesh sieve. Material shall have a coefficient of expansion of not more than 2 percent from air dry to optimum moisture content and not more than 6 percent from air dry to saturation. Imported material shall be clean and free of rubbish, debris, and toxic or hazardous contaminants. Adobe or clay soils are not permitted.

D. Other Fill Materials: Brick rubble and broken concrete originating from the Project site may be legally disposed of off the Project site or incorporated in fill, if reviewed by the Owner Consultant. Unless otherwise required, no such materials may be imported from outside the Project site.

E. Permeable Backfill:

1. Provide permeable backfill material behind retaining structures consisting of gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, natural sands, manufactured sand, or combinations of these materials conforming to the following gradations:

Sieve Size: Percentage Passing: 3/4 inch (19mm) 100 3/8 inch (10mm) 0-100 No. 100 0-8 No. 200 0-3

2. Those portions of fill material passing a No. 4 sieve shall provide a sand equivalent of at least 60.

3. Provided backing for weep-holes shall consist of 2 cu. ft. of aggregate in burlap sacks, securely tied. Aggregate shall conform to requirements for No. 3 concrete aggregate as specified in subsection 200-1.4 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

4. Permeable Backfill Alternate Materials: Instead of the materials specified for retaining structures backfill, a drainage matting system such as Miradrain by Mirafi, Inc., or equal, may be provided if reviewed by the Architect.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SITE PREPARATION

A. Clear the Project site as required in Section 02230: Site Clearing.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect and guard excavations against danger to life, limb, and property as required by, but not limited to, OSHA regulations.

B. Protect adjacent existing improvements including landscaping against damage.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITY LINES

A. Protect existing utility lines from damage or displacement.

B. Remove conduits or pipes not in service, exposed during Work, unless a minimum cover of 2 feet is provided. Remove concrete, clay or other non-metallic pipe over 8 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavations: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork,” except as modified herein.

3.05 FILL

A. Unclassified Fill and Compaction: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork,” except as modified herein.

B. Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2 – Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary.

C. In addition to the requirements of this section, import and/or exported materials shall comply with the requirements of Section 01440.

D. Imported fill materials shall be tested by the Owner Consultant for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this section.

E. Owner Consultant shall perform the tests by utilizing an independent approved Testing Lab.

F. Initial sampling and testing shall be performed before importing material to the Project site. Provide a Sample of the proposed material to the Owner Consultant. Identify the location of the source site in addition to the address, name of the person and/or entity responsible for the source site. Owner Consultant shall obtain additional samples from the identified site and perform required testing on all obtained samples.

G. The Owner Consultant shall perform additional sampling and testing during import operations. If the total quantity of import is determined to be greater than 1000 cubic yards of material, one sample shall be obtained and tested for each 250 cubic yards of imported material. If the total quantity of import is determined to be less than 1000 yards, one sample shall be obtained and tested for each 100 cubic yards of imported material.

H. The independent approved testing laboratory shall perform the required tests and report results of all tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and shall furnish copies to the IOR, Architect, OAR, DSA, Contractor, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California civil engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, Title 24, CCR and the DSA. Upon completion of the Work, testing laboratory shall submit a verified report to the DSA as required by Title 24, CCR.



I. Bills of lading or equivalent documentation will be submitted to the IOR on a daily basis.

J. Upon completion of import operations, provide the Owner a certification statement attesting that all imported material has been obtained from the identified source site.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS

A. Fill or backfill materials shall be installed in horizontal layers of 6 inches, unless otherwise required. Each layer shall be evenly placed and moistened or aerated as necessary. Unless otherwise reviewed by the Owner Consultant, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled before the next layer of material is installed. Top surface of each layer shall be installed to an approximate level with a crown or crossfall of at least 1 in 50, but no more than 1 in 20. Provide adequate drainage at all times during construction of the Work of this section.

3.07 COMPACTING

A. Each layer of fill material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers, or pneumatic-tired rollers to provide specified relative compaction. At inaccessible locations, provide specified compaction by manually held, operated and directed compaction equipment.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, compact each layer of earth fill to a relative compaction of at least 90 percent.

C. When fill materials, or a combination of fill materials, are encountered or provided which develop densely packed surfaces as a result of installation or compacting operations, scarify each compacted layer before installing the next succeeding layer.

3.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Owner Consultant will inspect and test excavations, material quality as required in Part 2, and installation and compaction of fill materials.

B. Owner Consultant will test imported fill materials from their designated source before delivery to the Project site.

C. Installation of backfill shall be observed by the Owner Consultant.

D. Owner Consultant will inspect and test excavation Work before the installation of fill and/or other materials.

E. Compaction: Test compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

END OF SECTION


BASE COURSE 02319 - 1

SECTION 02319

BASE COURSE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Installation of base material.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 02230 - Site Clearing.

3. Section 02316 - Excavation and Fill for Paving.

4. Section 02575 - Pavement Repair.

5. Section 02505 - Asphalt Paving.

6. Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to import, submit written certification to OAR that crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) does not contain Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) above laboratory detection limits when tested in accordance with EPA Method 8082, and obtain written approval from CUSD prior to import at the subject site, refer to Article 2.02 for sampling frequency.

B. Crushed aggregate base (CAB) shall consist of native rock without naturally occurring asbestos or recycled materials. The Contractor shall submit written documentation, which identifies the source, volume, and proposed transport date of the material for review and approval by CUSD prior to importing the material. A statement on company letterhead from the source, stamped by either a California Professional Geologist or Engineer, which states that the subject materials are native rock, do not contain any recycled materials and that the source does not mine ultramafic materials, a source of natural occurring asbestos shall be included in the submittal to OEHS. The Contractor may request variance from testing by Section 01 4523 for CAB. To be considered for a variance, the Contractor shall submit a documentation package, which includes all of the aforementioned information at least 48 hours in advance of planned import.

1. Frequently used suppliers:

a. Hansen Aggregates.

b. Vulcan Materials, Reliance Company.

c. Vulcan Materials Durbin.



C. Product Data: Submit material source, technical information and test data for base materials. Gradation and quality certifications shall be dated within 30 days of the submittal.

D. Sample: Submit Sample of proposed base course material.


A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS

A. The following base materials shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction: Section 200 - Rock Materials.

1. Crushed Aggregate Base.

2. Crushed Miscellaneous Base.

a. CMB meeting requirements of Article 1.02, A, may be used on-site for pavement base only.

b. CMB may be used off-site when in accordance to the Greenboook.

B. Materials generated on site shall not be used as a base course material.

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sampling and testing of imported and/or exported crushed miscellaneous base (CMB) shall be performed in accordance with the following Table 1 schedule:

TABLE 1: MINIMUM SAMPLING FREQUENCY

Volume (CY) Sampling Frequency

0 to 500 1 per 100 Cubic Yards

501 to 1,000 1 per 250 Cubic Yards

1,001 to 5,000 1 per 250 Cubic Yards for first 1,000 Cubic Yards 1 per 500 CY thereafter

5,001 to 20

12 samples for first 5,000 Cubic Yards 1 per 1,000 Cubic Yards thereafter

over 20,000 1 per 2,000 Cubic Yards for first 20,000 Cubic Yards 1 per 2,500 CY thereafter



2.03 MATERIAL APPROVAL

A. Base material shall be inspected by the Project Inspector for gradation and material content prior to installation. The owner may choose to have additional tests performed by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner, before installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install base course material in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness, unless required otherwise. Grade and compact to indicated levels or grades, cut and fill, water and roll until the surface is hard and true to line, grade and required section. Provide a relative compaction of at least 95 percent, unless otherwise required.

B. Grade base course to elevations indicated on Drawings, ready to receive surfacing, in accordance with Section 02310 - Grading.

3.02 PROTECTION


3.03 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

END OF SECTION


SITE CONCRETE WORK 02520-1

SECTION 02520

SITE CONCRETE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site concrete work indicated, including but not limited to following: 1. Portland cement concrete pavement, walkways, curbs and gutters, ramps,

mowing strips, fence post footings, catch basins, pipe bedding and encasements, thrust blocks, transition structures, or other areas as required by Architect.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02316: Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Pavement. B. Section 02319: Base Course. C. Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations and details of concrete site Work. B. Product Data: Submit mix designs and manufacturer’s technical data for materials and

products. Submit 3” x 3” concrete Sample of each specified color. C. Material Sample: Submit one concrete bumper to the IOR for destructive testing. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials: To conform to applicable provisions of Section

201 - "Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials" of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, except as modified herein.

1. Flatwork: Concrete 28 day compressive strength 3,000 psf unless specified

otherwise. 2. Reinforcing on flatwork: #4 bars at 24” on center both ways.

3. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed expansion joint filler (bituminous type) ASTM D994.

4. Reinforcing on other areas: #4 bars or as indicated on plans. B. Form Materials:


SITE CONCRETE WORK 02520-2

1. Side Forms: Douglas Fir, construction grade or better; or metal forms. 2. Stakes: Douglas Fir, construction grade or better; or metal stakes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURES A. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction as specified as follows: 1. Concrete Pavement: Portland Cement Concrete Pavement of Section 302-

"Roadway Surfacing". 2. Concrete curbs, walks, gutters, cross gutters, access ramps, driveways, catch

basins, yard boxes, vaults and similar structures: Section 303 - "Concrete and Masonry Construction".

3. Post, flagpole, light standard footings (below ground), underground conduit

bedding, encasements, thrust blocks and similar structures may be deposited directly to holes in ground conforming to their required sizes.

4. Placing reinforcement, placing concrete, surface finishes, curing and removal of

form shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 303 - "Concrete and Masonry Construction".

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PARKING BUMPERS A. Install bumpers as indicated on the Drawings. On bituminous paving, install anchors

through pavement and into the ground a minimum of 12 inches. On concrete pavement, install bumpers in a continuous bed of adhesive.

3.03 CLEAN UP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


PAVEMENT REPAIR 02575-1

SECTION 02575

PAVEMENT REPAIR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous Surfacing Repair: Areas removed for utility trenches, heaved by tree roots,

cracked areas, protruding areas where pavement meets hard surfaces, depressed areas, holes and areas around new structures, and raveled bituminous pavement.

B. Concrete Pavement Repair: Areas heaved by tree roots, cracked areas, holes and

trenches, and areas around new structures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02050: Demolition.

B. Section 02230: Site Clearing C. Section 02316: Excavating, Backfilling & Compacting for Pavement.

D. Section 02319: Base Course. E. Section 02520: Site Concrete.

E. Section 02575: Pavement Repair. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction, current edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials specified in Section 02230: Base Course. B. Materials specified in Section 02505: Bituminous Surfacing. C. Materials specified in Section 02506: Seal for Bituminous Surfacing. D. All materials specified in Section 02520: Site Concrete Work. 2.02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Use materials of the class, grade or type indicated on Drawings, conforming to all

relevant provisions of Section 203 - Bituminous Materials of the latest Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

2.03 HEADERS AND STAKES A. Headers: Redwood, Construction Heart Grade, size 2 x 6, unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings.



B. Stakes: 2 x 4 Redwood or 2 x 3 Douglas Fir, Construction Grade. C. Nails: Common, Galvanized, 12d minimum. 2.04 Cement-sand slurry shall contain one sack of cement per cubic yard of the mixture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENT REMOVAL A. Remove bituminous and concrete pavement in accordance with applicable provisions of

Section 300 - "Earthwork" of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

B. Pavement Heaved By Roots: Remove pavement to limits of distortion and expose roots to be trimmed by Contractor's tree surgeon.

C. Remove protruding bituminous surfaces flush with the surrounding grade using a

suitable tool or equipment so that adjacent improvement will not be blackended. Clean any marks on such adjacent improvement left as a result of the operation.

F. Remove raveled and depressed bituminous pavement to limits indicated or required.

E. Trim holes and trenches in bituminous and concrete pavement to size big enough to

allow mechanical hand tampers to compact the fill and to a neat even line by saw-cutting.

F. Remove broken concrete by saw-cutting. If cut would fall within 30" of a score line, joint

line or edge, remove to the score, joint or edge. 3.02 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING A. Conform to Sections 02316.

G. Where subgrade or base is determined to be unstable, excavate such materials to firm earth and replace with a suitable material. Spread and compact fill materials to the requirements of the applicable Sections of the Project Manual.

3.03 HEADERS A. Install headers along edge of bituminous surfacing where it abuts lawn, dirt or planting

area, unless indicated otherwise. B. Place headers so that bottom has continuous bearing on solid earth. Where excavation

for headers is undercut, tamp earth under the header thoroughly. Compact backfill on both sides of header to the density of the adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Hold headers in place with Redwood or Douglas Fir stakes of length necessary to extend

into solid earth a minimum of 12". All stakes shall be of sound material, neatly pointed, driven vertically, and securely nailed to headers. Space stakes, not to exceed 4'-0" on centers with top of stakes set 1" below top of header. Use minimum of 2-12d galvanized common nails through each stake.

D. Remove existing headers where new surfacing is placed to join existing surfacing. E. Install temporary headers at transverse joints of paving where continuous paving

operations are not maintained.



F. Provide additional stakes and anchorage as required to hold headers in place. True to

line and grade at Contractor's expense. 3.04 BASE COURSE A. Unless indicated on Drawings or in the Specifications base course shall be crushed

aggregate base, fine grade, 4" thick or equal to thickness of the existing base, whichever is thicker.

B. Fill grade and compact as specified in Grading: Section 02319. 3.05 RESURFACING A. Holes and Trenches: Remove loose dirt and backfill with cement-sand slurry allowing for

surfacing one-inch thicker than existing. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, resurface flush with existing adjoining pavement using the same type of materials used in original work.

B. Other Than Holes and Trenches: Other surface improvements damaged or removed as a

result of the contractor’s operation shall be cut to a neat even line and excavated 1"”below the bottom of the existing pavement. Resurface by following the original grades and using the same type of materials used in original work.

H. Where bituminous surfacing abuts concrete, masonry, walks or paving, tamp joint

smooth, if necessary, as described above to obtain a uniformly even joint, free of differences in elevation. Do all tamping and smoothly while surfacing is still sufficiently hot to properly compact.

3.06 REPAIRING AND RESEALING EXISTING SURFACES A. Preparation of Surfaces: 1. Prior to filling cracks, clean existing bituminous surfacing of loose and foreign

materials and coat with a film of asphalt emulsion. B. Repair of Existing Surfacing: 1. Fill cracks 1/2" wide and less with RS-1 emulsion and silica sand or other similar

material. Cracks more than 1/2" wide shall be filled with Type C2 Asphalt Concrete as specified. Cracks shall be filled to level of adjacent surfacing.

2. Where low areas, holes or depressions occur in existing surfacing, repair with

emulsified asphalt. After placing, strike off the emulsified asphalt with a straight-edge, flush with adjoining surfacing. Finish with a steel trowel, and after dehydration, compact by rolling where possible. If rolling is not practical, compact by tamping.

C. Testing: After the Inspector has reviewed and approved repairs. Contractor shall flood

test entire area in presence of the Inspector. Entire area tested shall be free of standing water or puddles.

D. Surface Seal: After surface has been repaired and tested, Contractor shall furnish and

apply seal coat over entire area indicated. Surface seal shall be as specified in Seal For Bituminous Surfacing: Section 02506.



END OF SECTION


CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES 02821-1

SECTION 02821

CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install Chain Link Fencing and Gates as indicated on the plans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02050 Demolition.

B. Section 02520 Site Concrete Work. C. Section 02575 Pavement Repair

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Class 500-6-2500 concrete prepared as prescribed in Section 201-1 "Concrete,

Mortar and Related Materials" of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction or at Contractor's option, may be mixed in the following volumetric proportions:

Portland Cement 1 Part Fine Aggregate 2 Parts Coarse Aggregate (1/4" to 1-1/2") 4 Parts Water 7-1/2 Gallons, maximum per sack of cement PSI 2500 B. Chain Link Fence Fabric: Conforming to "Specifications for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link

Fence Fabric" ASTM A392, Class C2 zinc coating, 2.00 oz. minimum per square foot of uncoated wire surface, hot-dipped galvanized after weaving, and top and bottom edges knuckled.

1. Fabric for site perimeter fencing and interior fencing shall be #9 gage woven wire

with 2" mesh, unless otherwise specified. For 16’-0” high fences, the upper 8’-0” of fabric may be #11 gage. Fences 12’-0” high or less shall use single width fabric.

2. Fence fabric erected shall be free from barbs, icicles, or other projections resulting

from galvanizing process, which might be hazardous. Fence fabric having such defects will be rejected even though it has been erected.

C. Posts, Top Rails, Brace Rails and Gate Frames: Standard weight, galvanized, welded

or seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, with a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi.



D. Schedule of Posts and Footings

Item

Height Nominal Pipe Size Inches

Outside Diameter Inches

Weight

Pounds per foot

Footings*

Diameter Inches

Depth Inches

Top Rail, Brace Rails and Transom Rails Up to 10’-0” 1-1/4 1.660 2.27 N/A N/A

10’-1” to 16’-0” 1-1/2 1.900 2.72 N/A N/A

Line Posts

Up to 6’-0” 2 2.375 2.65 12 24 6’-1” to 8’-0” 2 2.375 2.65 12 36

8’-1” to 10’-0” 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 18 42

10’-1” to 16’-0” 3 3.5 7.58 24 54 Terminal, Corner, Angle & Pull Posts

Up to 8’-0” 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 14 36

8’-0” to 10’-0” 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 18 42

10’-1” to 16’-0” 3-1/2 4.00 9.11 24 54 Pedestrian Gate Posts Up to 8’-0” 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 14 42

Gate Frames Up to 8’-0” 1-1/2 1.900 2.72 N/A N/A Driveway Double-Leaf Swing Gate Posts: Opening

Up to17'-3-1/2" Up to 8’-0” 3 3.5 7.58 24 54 17'-4" to 20'-3-1/2"

Up to 8’-0” 3-1/2 4 9.11 24 54

* Embed posts into footings 6” less than the depth of the footing. E. Post Caps: Malleable iron, (ASTM A47, Grade 32510), designed to fit snugly over posts with

a minimum projection of 1-1/2" below top of posts. Post caps shall be made with curved top. F. Eye Tops: Malleable iron, (ASTM A47, Grade 32510), designed to fit over line posts, and for

through passage of top rail. G. Expansion Sleeve Couplings for Top Rails: Steel, 6" long, designed to fit tightly on inside of

rail, fitted with raised center. H. Rail Ends for Top Rails and Brace Rails: Malleable iron, (ASTM A47, Grade 32510), with

holes to receive 3/8" bolts for securing to rail end bands. I. Tension Bands and Bands for Securing Rail Ends: Mild steel flats, not less than 1/8" x 1",

except tension bands in gates shall be 1/8" x 3/4". Bolts for use with tension bands and rail end bands shall be 3/8" x 1-1/2".



J. Tension Bars: Mild steel flats not less than 3/16" x 3/4". K. Tension Wire for Installation at Bottom of Fabric: #6 gage steel wire, conforming to

requirements of AISI Steel Products Manual, Carbon Steel Wire, Section 16, merchant quality, galvanized, soft temper with Type I coating.

L. Turnbuckles for use with Tension Wires: Eye and eye type, drop forged steel, right and left

hand threads, not less than 5/16" screw diameter with not less than 4-1/2" take-up. M. Tie Wire: Aluminum ties #6 gage for fastening fabric to posts, top rails and brace rails. At

bottom tension wire #9 gage galvanized hog rings shall be used.

N. Finish of Metal Parts: Post caps, couplings, rail ends, tension bands, tension bars, turnbuckles, rivets, bolts, and all other metal parts and fittings to be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, except bolts, which may be galvanized or cadmium-plated. Galvanizing shall conform with the requirement of applicable ASTM specifications, such as A569/A569M Standard Specification for steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip commercial Quality, A47/A47M Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings etc.

O. Paints for refurbishing existing fence posts, rails and accessories: A mixture of two paints

consisting of one part Dunn-Edwards syn-lusto gun metal spray and two parts Dunn-Edwards Aluminum to achieve the galvanized color of a new installation. List of approved equal paints may be obtained from the District

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fence heights indicated on Drawings refer to height of fence fabric. B. Space fence posts at equal intervals between terminal, angle, corner, and gate posts, and

not more than 10'-0" apart measured from center to center of posts. In curved fence sections having a radius of 50'-0" or less, space posts not more than 5'-6" apart. Set posts so that top of eye of post caps are level with top of fabric.

C. Install angle or corner posts at each change in direction of 15 degrees or more, at change of

5% or more in grade of fencing, and at the beginning and end of all curved fence sections. D. Install terminal posts at ends of runs of fencing. Install gate posts on both sides of driveway

and pedestrian gates. For double leaf gates, net opening between gate posts shall be gate size as noted on Drawings plus 3-1/2"; for single leaf gates, net opening shall be gate size plus 2-1/2".

E. Where a fence is to be installed on a curb, construct footings with their top in level with the

lower finish grade. Align posts, set plumb and true before pouring footings. Remove all cement from exposed pipe surfaces while cement is still soft. In bituminous surfaced areas, apply seal coat on top of concrete footings.

F. Install all fences with top rail. Top rail shall pass through eye tops and be secured at ends

with rail-end fittings and bands.



G. Provide all fences over 10'-0" in height, in addition to top rail, with a horizontal mid-rail set at mid-height of fence. The District will supply "Star" fittings for installation of mid-rail. In fences higher than 10'-0" set brace rails at all angles, corners, and terminals at 1/4th and 3/4th of fence height.

H. Provide one horizontal brace rail in all panels adjacent to terminal, angle, corner, and gate

posts, set at mid-height of fence and rigidly secured to posts with rail end fittings and bands. Provide horizontal brace rails, as specified, in all panels of curved sections having a radius of 50'-0" or less. Brace rails are not required in fencing 4'-0" or less in height.

I. Provide a transom rail and fabric at top of all pedestrian gate openings. Set transom rail 6'-

8" above high point of grade at gate opening. Ends of transom rails shall be pinned or riveted to rail end fittings with 1/4" mild steel rivets. Pin or rivet must go through rail and peen. No welding on rail ends.

J. Install bottom tension wire a minimum of 3" from grade for all fencing, and provide with

turnbuckle for each 150'-0" of wire or fractional part thereof. Turn-buckles are not required in runs of 25'-0" or less. Securely attach ends of tension wires to posts in a manner to prevent slipping or loss of tension. Turn end of wire around post twisted not less than 3 times around wire. At turnbuckles, wire through eye and twist end not less than 3 times around wire. Cut tail of bottom wire to flush.

K. Install fence fabric on outward facing side of posts, except for tennis courts. Install fence

fabric with top edge projecting above top rail of fence. L. Set bottom of fence fabric to clear finish grades, except on bituminous surface set 3/4" above

such surface. Locally shape and trench ground surfaces where necessary to provide uniform top and bottom alignment of fence.

M. Tightly stretch fabric and at terminal, pull corner, angle, and gate posts, secure with tension

bars extending full height of fence. Secure tension bars to posts with bolted tension bands spaced not more than 14" apart.

N. Bands and Ties: Install bands and ties in accordance with following schedule: 15 bands on 16'-0" fence 16 ties on 16'-0" fence 11 bands on 12'-0" fence 12 ties on 12'-0" fence 7 bands on 8'-0" fence 7 ties on 8'-0" fence 6 bands on 6'-0" fence 6 ties on 6'-0" fence 4 bands on 4'-0" fence 4 ties on 4'-0" fence O. Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced not more than 16" apart. Where #9 gage

wire or #6 gage aluminum ties are used, hook the tie at both ends. Use of hooked ties with links will not be permitted.

P. Fasten fabric to top rails, mid-rails, brace rails, and bottom tension wire with wire ties spaced

not more than 18" apart. Bend back ends of tie wires so as not to be a hazard. At bottom tension wire, use hog rings spaced not more than 18" apart. Where 2 fabrics are used, lap the fabrics one mesh at mid-rail and tie both fabrics with #9 gage wire or #6 gage aluminum ties to midrails.

Q. Field welds shall be cleaned of flux and spatter, all damaged galvanizing removed, all

hazardous projections ground off, properly prepared, then heavily coated with “Galviz” or "Galvabar" or equivalent, distributed by Prixair Ph. No. (800) 225-8247, Airgas Ph. No. (800) 224-7427. Apply coating in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions.



R. Fabrication of Gates: 1. Frames: Fabricate gate frames from steel pipe of size specified, with joints at

corners miter cut and continuously welded to sides. 2. Fabric: Attach fence fabric to side members with tension bars and tension bands as

specified, spaced not more than 14" apart. Tension bars shall extend full height of gate. Attach fence fabric to top and bottom members and to brace rail with wire ties as specified for top rails, spaced not more than 12" apart.

3. Latches: Gate latches and strikes will be furnished by the District. Weld gate

latches and strikes to gate posts and frames. Welding shall be done before gate frames are galvanized, or welds shall be finished as specified for field welds.

4. Hinges: Hinges, including bolts, of type allowing gate to swing back parallel to line

of fencing will be furnished by the District. Install and adjust hinges; burr or center punch threads of gate hinge bolts to prevent removal of nuts. Install 3 hinges on each post for swing gates more than 16'-0" wide.

5. Grind all welds flush and smooth, hot-dip galvanize all fabricated parts after welding, or in lieu there of, finish all welds as specified for fieldwelds.

3.02 REINSTALLED FENCING A. Where existing fencing is indicated to be reset or relocated, remove existing concrete

footings from posts and dispose of off the site. Construct new concrete footings, as specified, in their designated location. Replace all parts of fencing that are broken or damaged during removing and rein-stalling work with new parts as specified to complete reinstallation. New materials shall closely match design of existing installation. Top rail will be required in reinstalled fencing which does not have top rail in its existing condition. Install as specified for new installations.

B. Existing fences shall be reset where finish pavement is raised or lowered more than 6" from

existing grade. Remove and reinstall entire fence assembly as specified. 3.03 FENCING ADJUSTMENTS A. Where the finish grade is raised 6" or less, cut and reknuckle the existing fence fabric.

Adjust tension wire and tie to fabric. B. Where the finish pavement is lowered 6" less, chip/off the fence footing flush with the finish

grade and adjust the fabric and its attachments. C. Post footings and fabrics previously shortened and needing readjustment shall be entirely

replaced. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GATES A. Provide gates of the sizes indicated on Drawings. Allow clearance on gates of 1-1/2" at

bottom and 1" at top. Construct gates set in sloping areas to conform to the grade. Provide an opening in each gate for access to locking device or padlock. Knuckle ends of fabric cut for opening to eliminate hazards.

B. Sliding Gates and Swing Barricade Gates: Construct and install as indicated on Drawings.

Items to be furnished by the District are indicated on Drawings.



3.05 RE-FENCING A. Fabric removal: Do not remove fence fabric more than what can be replaced during a day’s

work unless a barricade, which could provide equal security as the fence to be removed, will be erected in its place.

B. Post and rails: Bent posts, rails and accessories shall be replaced. Cut bent portion of posts

and weld new sections of equal diameter and thickness.

C. Painting

1 Preparation: Prepare exposed steel posts, rails and accessories thoroughly cleaned of rust, oil and foreign materials using a method approved by the Inspector. Painted galvanized metal shall be stripped to bare metal before applying prime coat.

2 Priming: Spot prime areas from which the original surface coating had been

removed with a metal primer to match adjoining surfaces. Subsequently, apply a prime coat to the entire surface to be painted.

3 First Coat: Apply first coat as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Use color

that is 10% to 15% lighter or darker than the finish coat.

4 Second or Finish Coat: Apply finishing coat after the first coat has dried.

5 Apply paints following manufacturer’s printed instructions. 3.06 COMPLETION A. Completed fencing shall form continuous units between points indicated with all required

parts, accessories, and fittings provided and installed. Clean all exposed metal surfaces of cement, grout and other foreign substances.

B. Fill in holes left by removal of existing fence footings, except in areas where grading work is

indicated or specified, to existing grade with clean earth thoroughly compacted to at least same density as adjoining soil.

3.10 SURPLUS MATERIALS DISPOSAL A. All existing fencing, including fabric, posts, parts and fittings, removed and not reused in

work, shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from site, unless otherwise specified or noted on Drawings.

B. Dispose of off the site all surplus earth.

END OF SECTION


CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100-1

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and installation of formwork required for all cast-in-place concrete as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Conform to ACI 347 Chapter 1: Design and Chapter 3: Materials for Formwork. B. Plywood: Conform to tables for form design and strength in APA Form V 345. C. Except as otherwise specified herein, work of this Section shall be in accordance with Title 24,

Part 2, Chapter 19A, "Concrete", California Code of Regulations (2013 edition). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials shall be new except for reusable joist forms. Materials may be reused during progress

of work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each reuse, capable of producing formwork of required quality and are structurally sound.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Footings, Foundations, Ramps, Landings, Steps and Floor Slabs: Douglas fir "Standard or

Better" boards, wood or steel stakes. B. Studs, Wales, Shoring, Bracing, Centering: "Standard" grade or "Better", Douglas fir, adequate

designed size, not less than 2 x 4. C. Wall Forms: Wall forms shall be 3/4" minimum, Douglas fir plywood, Grade B-B, Class I or II,

Exterior, sanded both sides conforming to U.S. Product Standard 1-83. Plywood shall be edge-sealed and oiled both sides with colorless form oil.

D. Forms For Square or Rectangular Columns and Beam and Girder Bottoms: 2" thick Douglas fir

planks or joists, S1S2E. Beam and girder sides may be constructed of plywood. Column forms shall be made with tight joints and shall be securely clamped together with steel clamps. Beam and girder sides shall be secured to prevent spreading.

E. Forms For Round Columns: Standard steel or fiber column forms. If columns are to be exposed,

use seamless fiber tubes.



F. Concrete Joist Forms: Adjustable type steel pans CRSI standard design or masonite "pres-pan"

system. G. Exposed Concrete Moldings and Ornamental Surfaces: Reverse molded soft pine mould

properly placed and secured in forms. Molded surfaces shall be dressed to true, smooth surfaces and oiled. Projecting wood molds shall be constructed to allow proper removal, to avoid fracture of section.

H. Form Oil: Form oil shall be non-staining type, appropriate for use with forms specified and

not detrimental to finished concrete surface or applied finish materials. I. Chamfer Strips: Type CST 3/4" diagonal face, PVC strips. J. Ties: Carbon steel tie-rods with a breakback depth of 1", and a maximum cone diameter of

1-1/4", or approved equal. K. Metal Construction Joints: "Keyed-Kold", by Burke Concrete Accessories or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Forms shall be constructed so as to form final concrete structure which conforms to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications, and shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged. Forms shall be true to line within 1/250 of the span.

3.02 ERECTION A. Plywood shall be laid out with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with all joints tight.

Back all joints by studs or solid blocking, and fill where necessary for smoothness. Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.

B. Openings For Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at all points in formwork deemed

necessary by the Inspector to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned, inspected and approved. Do not install board until after approval.

3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Forms shall not be removed until concrete has hardened sufficiently to maintain its integrity and

not be damaged by form removal operations. Columns and walls shall not be stripped in less than 5 days, floor slabs in less than 7 days, beams and girders in less than 15 days. Metal pan forms for joists may be removed after 3 days, but joist centering shall not be removed until after 15 days. Ramp, landing, steps and floor slabs shall not be stripped in less than 7 days. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.



B. Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete.

END OF SECTION


CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200-1

SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install concrete steel reinforcement as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. B. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315.

Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Show length and location of splices, and size and length of reinforcing steel.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials for the work under this Section shall comply with the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice. 3. American Welding Society (AWS). 4. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 5. California Building Code, Chapter 19, "Concrete", 2013 edition. 6. Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with

requirements of Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 19A, California Code of Regulations (2013 edition).

B. For testing and inspection requirements, see Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on site to permit easy access

for proper examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape in a manner approved by the District Inspector.

B. Protect reinforcing from excessive rusting or coating with grease, oil, dirt or other

objectionable materials.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 deformed grade 40 billet steel

unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A184. C. Steel Wire For Concrete: ASTM A82 (smooth). D. Wire Fabric For Reinforcement: ASTM A185. E. Tie Wire: Fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, #16 gage minimum.

F. Chairs, Spacers, Supports and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI-315 "Manual of Standard Practice," made from steel wire of approved types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, use properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent

except as indicated on approved shop drawings. Before placing, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that would destroy or reduce bond.

B. Accurately position and secure reinforcing in place as indicated and specified. Secure

reinforcing so that it will not be displaced while placing concrete. C. Use metal chairs to hold reinforcement the proper distance above form bottoms. In

beams and slab construction, use chairs under top slab reinforcement as well as under bottom reinforcement. Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced under a person's weight. Use metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, use concrete blocks to support reinforcement at proper distance above earth.

D. Place and secure reinforcement to maintain proper clearance between parallel bars, and

between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be made wherever possible in a manner to provide proper clearance between sets of bars. Lapped splices shall in general be staggered. Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is placed, and shall be cleaned of concrete adhering thereto immediately after completion of pour while concrete encrustations are still soft.

E. Do not place reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have

been poured to underside of slabs and beams, nor until construction joints have been thoroughly cleaned.

F. Reinforcing shall be checked before concrete is placed and cleaned again if required. G. Use deformed bars everywhere except for spiral reinforcement and where Drawings or

Specifications specifically call for plain or smooth reinforcement to be used.



END OF SECTION


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install Cast-In-Place Concrete as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. B. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Standard references shall conform to current edition of following specifications relating to

work of this Section. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication: 1. ACI 211 "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Concrete". 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

Concrete." 3. ACI 305 "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 4. ACI 306 "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." 5. ACI 308 "Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete." 6. ACI 309 "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete." C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: 1. A185 "Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement." 2. C31 "Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field." 3. C33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates." 4. C39 "Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens." 5. C88 "Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sulphate or

Magnesium Sulphate." 6. C94 "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete." 7. C143 "Standard Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete."



8. C150 "Standard Specification for Portland Cement." 9. C171 "Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete." 10. C172 "Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete." 11. C173 "Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method." 12. C227 "Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar

Method)." 13. C231 "Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method." 14. C260 "Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete." 15. C289 "Standard Method of Test for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates." 16. D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete

Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: Submittals. 1. Mix Design: Testing laboratory designated by the District and DSA shall submit a

concrete mix design for each mix that will be used on job. Include water/ cement ratio, size of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture. Predict minimum compressive strength, maximum slump and air content percentage. Mix design, see Section 01405: Testing and Inspection.

2. Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the Inspector a certificate with

each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate and admixture, if any, contained in load.

3. Certificates: Submit a notarized certificate that each of following conforms to

standards indicated: a. Aggregates - See Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. b. Admixtures - ASTM Standards. c. Curing materials - ASTM Standards. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Continuous inspection shall be maintained at batch plant, see Section 01405: Testing and

Inspection, and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck.

B. Inspection shall be made by a representative of a Testing Laboratory selected by the District.

The District will pay for inspection costs. Contractor shall notify the Laboratory 24 hours in



advance of time concrete is to be mixed, and shall promptly notify the Laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing. Contractor shall reimburse the District for costs incurred resulting from failure to give adequate notification of postponement or cancellation.

C. Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived, see Section 01405: Testing

and Inspection. Such waiver shall be in writing, with approval of the DSA. D. Strength test of concrete, see Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Mixing and placing concrete, see Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. B. Ready mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94. Each batch

of concrete delivered at job site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departure time and signature of batch plant supervisor. Concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes after start of mixing.

C. Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by

foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be used for concrete. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting

concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. All ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used.

2. When depositing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall

have a temperature of at least 50° F., but not more than 90° F. when cement is added. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50° F. for not less than 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hardened. When necessary, concrete materials shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be taken for protection of transit-mixed concrete.

B. Hot Weather Requirements: During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients,

production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation which would impair required strength or serviceability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of CBC Section

1905A, Ready-Mix Concrete. B. Strength of Concrete: All concrete, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall have a

minimum ultimate 28 day strength of 3000 psi (f'c). For high-early-strength concrete, age for reaching the f'c shall be indicated on Drawings.



2.02 MATERIALS A. Cement: "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" ASTM C150. Cement used shall

correspond to that on which selection of concrete proportions was based. B. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate",

ASTM C33 and C227 except as modified herein. Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregate may be used, provided Grading of Combined Aggregate indicated in following table is obtained: (Refer to Section 01405: Testing and Inspection.)

GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATE Sieve Number or 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" Size in Inches Maximum Maximum Maximum Passing a 2" ------ ------ ------ Passing a 1-1/2" 95-100 ------ ------ Passing a 1" 70-90 90-100 ------ Passing a 3/4" 50-80 70-95 90-100 Passing a 3/8" 40-60 45-70 55-75 Passing a No. 4 35-55 35-55 40-60 Passing a No. 8 25-40 27-45 30-46 Passing a No. 16 16-34 20-38 23-40 Passing a No. 30 12-25 12-27 13-28 Passing a No. 50 2-12 5-15 5-15 Passing a No. 100 0-3 0-5 0-5 C. Water: Water shall be potable and free from deleterious matter. D. Admixtures: Concrete admixture, see Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. E. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of

thickness indicated, conforming to "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", ASTM D1751.

F. Curing Paper and Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Curing Paper: A standard brand conforming to "Standard Specification for Sheet

Materials for Curing Concrete," ASTM C171, Type 1 - Regular, Kure-N-Seal. 2. Liquid Curing Compounds: A standard brand, clear liquid conforming to "Standard

Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", ASTM C309. Master Builders, Grace Antihydro.

G. Floor Hardener: Mineral or metallic hardener, color as selected by the Architect. Floor

hardener shall be one of following:



1. "Lithochrome" of L.M. Scofield Co., Los Angeles, California. 2. "Colorcron" or "Masterplate", Master Builders. 3. "Hydroment", The Upco Company. 4. "Harcol" or Ferrolith "H", Sonneborn Building Products. H. Abrasive: Aluminum Oxide grain, uniformly graded, screen size 12-13 or 16-30, "Alundum" or

"Aloxite." I. Underlayment: Latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete shall be "Tile-Tex" by

Flintkote Co., "Webtex" #60 or "Fixallatex" by Dowman Products Co., or approved equal. J. Moisture Barrier: Shall be a 6 mils thick, pure virgin polyethylene membrane sheet complying

with FHA Test Procedure G-21. 1. Moisture barrier is required where an interior area is to have finished floor installed. K. Stair Nosing: 2 part abrasive stair nosing, type PH-330 as manufactured by Balco Inc., or

approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors,

hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely and properly fastened in proper positions. Reinforcement and forms shall be examined by the Structural Engineer 24 hours before concrete is placed.

B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on site of time and date of placing concrete in each

portion of structure. Such record shall be kept until completion of structure and shall be available for examination by the Division of the State Architect.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly dampen subgrade to ensure that no moisture will be absorbed from fresh

concrete except in areas to receive a moisture barrier. B. Moisture Barrier: Prior to placing of screeds and slab reinforcement, place a moisture barrier

at all interior floor slabs. Place membrane in as large sheets as possible, lapped 12" sides and ends, with top lap placed in the direction of the spreading of concrete. Extend membrane and lap at least 4" onto all adjoining wall surfaces and seal with pressure-sensitized tape. The Inspector shall approve membrane placement before concrete is placed.

1. Place moisture barrier on 2" bed of sand over gravel base. 2. Patch punctures and tears in moisture barrier. C. Reglets and Rebates: 1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment

as detailed and required. Dimension and position of required reglets and rebates shall be verified with trades whose work is related thereto.



2. If concrete slabs on grade join a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a

reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete work. Reglet shall be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4" deep, unless otherwise indicated. Exterior walks need not be thus provided for, except where detailed.

D. Anchor Slots: Dove-tail anchor slots at concrete walls to receive masonry veneer shall be set

vertically in forms, 24" maximum on centers measured horizontally. Anchor slots shall be #24 gage galvanized sheet steel with removable fiber filler to prevent seepage of cement in slot.

E. Screeds: Set screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel

reinforcement has been placed, but before starting to place concrete. Set screeds adjacent to all walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8'-0" on centers.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conveying and Placing: 1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct supervision of the District Inspector. Do

not place concrete outside of regular working hours, unless the District's Inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance and is present.

2. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will

prevent separation or loss of materials. 3. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid

segregation due to rehandling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited, nor shall retempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be used.

4. In depositing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections of considerable height,

openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other approved devices, shall be placed in a manner that will prevent segregation and accumulation of hardened concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete. Such devices shall be so installed that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to placement surface shall be no greater than 6'-0".

5. Once concrete placing is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until

placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level.

6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement, and shall be worked

around reinforcement and embedded fixtures using mechanical vibrators. 7. Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or where reinforcement is congested,

batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as used in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least 1".

B. Compaction and Screeding: 1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8" of mortar is

brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with heavy straightedge until all depressions and irregularities are worked out, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris worked to surface.



2. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface shall not be done. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.

C. Floating and Troweling: 1. When concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth

surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces, shall receive not less than 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.

2. For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall produce hard, impervious, and nonslip

surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall contact a 10'-0" straightedge for its entire length. A maximum of 1/8" tolerance will be permitted. Sprinkling a mixture of dry cement and sand on concrete slab to absorb surface moisture will not be permitted. Burnishing which produces smooth, slick surfaces, shall be avoided.

a. Floor of Walk-In Refrigerator: Finish as specified above, to a smooth finish. Floor to be level 1/8" = 10'-0".

3. At gymnasium locker room floors finish as specified above, except surface shall be

given a non-slip rotary finish. 4. Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall

be given a non-slip broom finish to match sample provided by the District Inspector. 5. Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks. D. Curing: 1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50° F., and in a moist condition for at least the

first 7 days after placing, except that high early strength concrete shall be maintained in such a condition for at least the first 3 days.

2. Before applying curing paper, interior floor treated with colored hardener shall be

given a heavy protective coat of colored wax left unpolished, and then immediately covered with paper. If wax is not applied within two hours after final troweling, concrete shall be sprayed with a fine water mist and kept continuously moist until wax is applied, unless spraying is not recommended by hardener manufacturer. After all other work, including plastering and painting has been completed, curing paper shall be removed and waxed floors cleaned of protective wax coating. Clean all floors to their original condition.

3. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and all exposed concrete

surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for not less than 7 consecutive days after placing.

4. If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving

with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been applied.



5. Immediately after finishing, roof slabs and monolithic floor finish to receive resilient floor covering, shall be uniformly and completely coated with liquid curing compound.

a. Apply compound in a manner and quantity sufficient to produce a uniform continuous thin film of water-impervious membrane. Compound shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

b. Protect adjoining surfaces from damage during application. If curing

compound is not applied immediately, cover finished concrete with wet burlap or curing paper and keep concrete surface wet for a period not to exceed thirty hours following finishing of concrete. At end of that time burlap or paper shall be removed and curing compound applied as specified above.

6. Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs not to receive resilient floor covering

shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 3" at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. If paper is torn or damaged during construction operations, it shall be repaired or replaced in manner acceptable to the Inspector. Paper shall be on work site before starting cement finishing, and shall remain in place until permission is given by the Inspector to remove paper.

7. Within 24 hours after finishing, all exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to

receive cement topping or mortar setting bed shall be covered with sand to depth of 2" and kept thoroughly wet for 7 days. Protection shall be removed when directed by the Inspector, and surfaces washed clean.

a. In lieu of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface

treatment is specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound applied immediately, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

E. Filling, Leveling and Patching: 1. Concrete slabs which have high or low spots and are to receive resilient floor

covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required levels. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed completely,

through all exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded off flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.

F. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of height, thickness and shape detailed. Base shall be

reinforced with 1" mesh, #18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one volume portland cement, 2 volumes of fine aggregate and one volume pea gravel. Colored cement base, where called for, shall include a chemically-inert mineral oxide pigment in mixture.

3.04 FINISHING A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and which

have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. All surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been used shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20% muriatic acid. As soon as surfaces have been scrubbed, they shall be washed with clean water.



B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs and walls shall be "sacked" by an application of portland cement grout, floated and rubbed. "Sacking" shall not be carried out until all patching and filling of holes has been performed. Entire "sacking" operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed same day.

1. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a

grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with brushes or spray-gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.

2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing all excess

grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove all dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.

C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or

other smooth forms have been used, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. All such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clear water after sandblasting.

D. Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on interior and exterior of

buildings, and all interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish. Abrasive grains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly applied by "dust-on" method and embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly applied and embedded into surface during final troweling operation. The Inspector shall verify that abrasive material is on site before Contractor orders concrete delivery.

E. Floor Hardener: All exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor

hardener, as specified. Apply hardener after surface of concrete has reached the point where no excess moisture shows, but while it is still plastic. Hardener shall be applied as follows:

1. Colored Hardener: Apply at rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for

initial application. 2. Gray (natural) Hardener: Apply at rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet of surface

for initial application. 3. Hardener shall be evenly distributed and thoroughly floated into surface mortar with a

wood float. An additional 20 pounds of hardener, colored or gray, specified as above , shall be applied over each 100 square feet, and troweled to an even surface having uniform color and texture.

F. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at site and shall be

composed of one volume of portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. Materials shall be mixed dry and sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a "dry-pack concrete", add sufficient water to make a stiff mixture which can be molded into a sphere.

G. Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall receive a non-slip broom finish in

addition to abrasive finish specified. H. Abrasive Stair Nosing: All stairs shall receive an abrasive 2 part nosing. Nosing shall be

installed according to manufacturer's recommendations.



3.05 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated

on Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, as directed by the Architect, in accordance with following:

1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5

days after initial pour. 2. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement used in concrete plus a

maximum of 50% of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least 1" on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.

3. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of

any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be recleaned before applying mix. B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. If

joints are not indicated, they shall be spaced approximately 20'-0" apart. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8" thick unless otherwise indicated.

C. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings

made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5'-0" wide.

3.06 TESTING A. Molded Cylinder Tests: See Section 01405: Testing and Inspection. 1. The Inspector shall prepare cylinders. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number,

point in structure from which sample was taken, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted.

2. Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders taken at same place and time shall be

made at age of 7 days and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strength of 2 cylinders, made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c.

3. Test cylinders shall be made at job and stored in testing laboratory in accordance

with ASTM C31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. B. Core Test: At request of the Inspector, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions

of hardened structures for testing, in accordance with UBC 1905A6.1.1, and ASTM C42. 1. Cores shall be taken at representative places throughout the structure as designated

by the Structural Engineer and shall be at least 4" in diameter. 2. In general, sufficient cores shall be taken so that knowledge will be had for all pours

made. At least one core shall be taken for each 4000 square feet of building. Not less than 3 cores shall be taken from each project.

3. Where cores have been cut from work, Contractor shall fill void with drypack and

patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces.



C. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency by "Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete," ASTM C143. This test shall be made by the District Inspector twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer.

D. Adjustment of Mix: Should the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of work, as

indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, the Architect will direct the testing laboratory to adjust mix for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.

E. Defective Concrete: 1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of work indicated by tests of

molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect, Inspector and the Division of the State Architect.

2. Any concrete work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250th of span,

not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective and shall be removed and replaced.

F. Concrete For Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated,

strength shall be 2500 psi concrete, proportioned and mixed in accordance with requirements of this Section. Exposed concrete shall have a hand-troweled finish with neatly rounded corners and edges. Cast in forms where necessary as described in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and reinforced as described under Section 03200. Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete mix for underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, use 3/4" to 1" rock as specified in this Section for concrete mix.

END OF SECTION


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

B. Comply also with Structural General Notes on Drawings, if any.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Work includes framing, wood nailers, grounds, furring, blocking, sheathing, roof curbs and platforms, underlayment, framing connectors, nailing, screws and bolts.


A. Prior to covering or finishing, the following shall be approved by the Architect and inspected by the Building Inspector:

1. Nailing of roof and wall sheathing.

B. Comply with California Building Code requirements and American Plywood Association

Standards and recommendations. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Keep materials covered, ventilated and dry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Lumber: Comply with PS-20, WCLIB No. 16, and WWPA Grading Rules. Factory mark each piece.

B. Sheathing: Plywood complying with PS 1, grade marked.

C. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of installation.

2.02 MATERIALS (NOTE: NOT ALL ITEMS MAY OCCUR ON PROJECT.)

A. Lumber: S4S, Douglas Fir, unless indicated otherwise:

1. Beams, Posts, and Facias: No. 1, except Select Structural where indicated.

2. Rafters and Joists: No. 2, except where indicated otherwise on Drawings.

3. Blocking, Bridging, Furring, Backing, etc.: No. 2.

4. Sill Plates: PTDF.

5. Wood Cants and Nailers at Roof: PTDF or Construction Heart Redwood.



6. Wall Studs: No. 2 or Construction Grade, unless indicated otherwise.

7. Roof Decking: Match existing, T&G.

8. Slats at Portable Building: Select Heart Redwood.

B. Sheathing: Douglas Fir, Structural I, CD grade plywood with exterior glue, of span rating or

thickness indicated.

C. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Nails: Common size. Vinyl-coated sinkers are not permitted.

2. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, with standard cut washers under heads and nuts.

3. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.

4. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.

5. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER- 272. These may be used only where indicated.

6. Framing Connectors: Simpson Co., galvanized.

7. Hot dip galvanize exterior nails, bolts and lags.

8. Machine Nailing: Not permitted unless approval is obtained by Contractor upon written

request prior to beginning Work. Submit information on type of fasteners and equipment proposed.

a. Approval, if granted, is subject to satisfactory field installation and continued

satisfactory performance. b. Provide a jobsite demonstration of proposed installation. c. If nail heads penetrate the outer ply more than would be normal for a hand hammer or

if minimum allowable edge distances are not maintained, the Work will be rejected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Accurately layout Work to properly position all elements to proper line and levels.

B. Accurately cut and fit lumber into location, true to line, grade, and level, and permanently secure.

C. Make connections between members tight, accurate and secure. Do not split wood; predrill

when required. Replace split members. Drill bolt holes same size as bolt diameter; for lag screws same as thread root diameter. Retighten bolts and lag screws just prior to applying finishes.

D. Coat field cuts of treated wood with same preservative used for treatment, and dip ends of

wooden posts bearing on concrete in Cuprinal.

E. Comply with California Building Code Table 23-I-Q for minimum nailing and with Chapter 23.



3.02 FRAMING

A. Use longest practicable lengths, place with crown side up. Splice only over bearings. Cut in solid blocking at ends and over bearings. Double up all headers and trimmers wherever normal joist spacing is interrupted at an opening.

B. Provide full depth 2 in. thick solid blocking. Place at all bearings, and place at mid-span where

it is greater than 8 ft. and less than 16 ft. or as otherwise shown. Blocking may be omitted at ceiling and roof joists 8" and less in depth.

C. Nailing of sheathing shall be inspected and approved before covering. Minimum size sheet

size is 8 sq.ft., and minimum dimension is 24".

1. Stagger end joints in horizontal and vertical diaphragm sheathing and run over at least 2 supports, with face grain perpendicular to framing.

2. Provide solid blocking between each framing member at edges at shear walls, unless

indicated otherwise.

3. Diaphragm and shear wall nailing is indicated on Drawings.

4. Provide 1/8" gap at edges and end joints of plywood sheathing at walls, floors, and roofs unless otherwise recommended by sheathing manufacturer, including wall locations behind plaster.

5. Nail sheathing from center toward edges.

D. Securely fasten framing connectors using size and quantity of nails, screws and bolts

recommended by manufacturer.

E. Do not cut or notch structural members without obtaining Architect's approval.

F. Headers: 4 x 4 minimum unless indicated otherwise. 3.03 WOOD STUD PARTITIONS

A. Space studs at 16" o.c. unless indicated otherwise.

B. Attach sills to concrete, locate anchors a maximum of 8" from end of each piece and not to exceed 48" o.c. Attach each sill with a minimum of two anchors. Sills at nonbearing interior walls on concrete slabs may be attached with power driven fasteners at 32" o.c., penetrating 1-1/2" minimum into concrete, unless indicated otherwise.

C. Provide double plates with splices staggered at least 4 ft. and with corners and intersections

lapped and nailed. Nail splices with (12) 16d nails.

D. Attach studs adjacent to concrete or masonry with power driven fasteners (three to each stud).

E. Frame openings with full height stud at each jamb with adjacent cripple supporting header and nailed to stud. Use single member headers.

F. Provide fire stops at floor and ceiling lines, either composed of continuous plate or blocking of 2

in. x width of stud installed between studs. Provide intermediate blocking between floor and ceiling.



G. Provide 2 in. thick blocking between studs and properly located for attachment of wall hung equipment.

H. Frame out openings for installation of recessed equipment.

I. Frame corners and intersections with at least 3 studs.

J. Install piping and conduits on the centerline of the partition. Where pipe or conduit exceeds 2"

diameter, provide sheet metal straps both sides.

1. If studs must be cut or notched, exterior wall and bearing wall studs may be notched a maximum of 25% of the stud depth. Non-bearing wall studs may be notched to a maximum of 40% of the stud depth.

2. A hole not greater than 40% of the stud depth may be bored in the center any stud. A hole

of 60% of the stud depth may be bored in non-bearing studs or in any stud where such stud is doubled, provided not more than two such successive doubled studs are so bored.

3. Where plumbing, heating or other pipes necessitate the cutting of the soles or plates, fasten

a 1/8" thick x 1- 1/2" wide metal tie to the plate across and to each side of the opening, nailed with not less than (4) - 16d nails.

K. Provide furring or stripping and shim where necessary to align faces of finish materials in a

single plane.

1. Where plywood occurs on walls, including shear walls, provide plywood fillers, such as above and below openings, so that wall thickness is uniform. Nail filler plywood adjacent to shear walls with same nailing as for shear walls.

L. Where ceiling joists are not parallel to roof rafters, tie back rafters with 1 x 4 cross ties at 4' o.c.,

nailed to rafters with (3) - 16d nails.

END OF SECTION

PART 1 - COMPTON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT IT DEPARTMENT – BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS

SHEATHING 06115- 1

SECTION 06115

SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Includes But Not Limited To

1. Furnish and install wood sheathing required for walls, roofs, and floors as described in Contract Documents.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.

1.02 Submittals

A. Quality Control

1. Submit technical and engineering data on nails to be set by nailing guns for Architect’s approval of types proposed to be used as equivalents to specified hand set nails.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Execute product manufacturer’s special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store products in manufacturer’s original shipping containers.

B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required.

C. Store sheathing on level racks and keep free of ground. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General

1. Meet Requirements of PS 1-83 / ANSI A199.1 except where APA Performance Rated units are specified. Every sheet shall bear appropriate APA grade stamp identifying species of plywood of by Certificate of Inspection issued by approved lumber grading or inspection bureau or agency listed above.

2. Plywood shall not exceed 19% moisture content prior to covering.

3. This specification is written for APA Performance Rated Plywood. Waterboard, Composite board, and Oriented Strand Board (but not Structural Particleboard) are accepted as equals providing specified span ratings are met. In all cases, thickness shown is minimum regardless of span rating. Material used for same purpose shall be stamped ‘Sized for Spacing’.

4. Panels shall be stamped ‘Sized for Spacing’

B. General Use Sheathing Including Subflooring

1. Exposure 1.


SHEATHING 06115- 2

2. Thickness Span Rating 3/8 inch 24/0 15/32 inch 32/16 ½ inch 32/16 19/32 inch 40/20 5/8 inch 40/20 23/32 inch 48/24 ¾ inch 48/24

C. Underlayment – PS-1 Underlayment grade, exposure 1.

D. Nails

1. Up to & including 3/8 inch panel – 8d common or box.

2. 15/32 inch & thicker panel – 10d common or galvanized box.

3. Underlayment – 4d ring shanked.

E. Pressure Treated Wood

1. Treat plywood in contact with concrete or masonry in accordance with LP 2-80 and dried after treatment.

a. Lumber grade and species shall be as specified for the particular use.

b. Identify treated lumber as to name of treater, preservative used, and retention in lbs/cu ft.

c. Season after treatment to moisture content required for nontreated material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Nail heads shall be flush with, but not penetrate, sheathing surface.

2. Use of edge clips to provide spacing between sheathing panels is acceptable.

B. Wall Sheathing

1. Spacing –

a. Provide 1/8 inch space between sheets at end and side joints.

b. Stagger panel end joints.

2. Edge Bearing & Blocking –

a. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their centerlines.

b. Back block panel edges which do not bear on framing members with 2 inch nominal framing.

3. Nailing – Place nails not less than 3/8 inch in from edge and 12 inches on center along intermediate supports and 4 inches on center along panel edge unless shown otherwise on drawings.

4. Thickness – 15/32 inch minimum. (Unless noted otherwise on Drawings)


SHEATHING 06115- 3

C. Roof Sheathing

1. Placing –

a. Lay face grain at right angles to supports. Provide blocking for support where framing turns at roof overhang.

b. Provide 1/8 inch space between sheets at end and side joints.

c. Stagger panel end joints.

d. Sheathing shall be continuous of two spans minimum.

2. Nailing – (Unless noted otherwise on Drawings)

a. Place nails at least 3/8 inch in from edge.

b. Nail 6 inches on center along supported edges. Nail 12 inches on centers on intermediate supports.

c. Nail 4 inches on center at –

3. Diaphragm boundaries

4. Blocking above plywood sheathed walls and block masonry walls.

5. At shear wall struts and fascias.

6. Thickness – 19/32 inch minimum (Unless noted otherwise on Drawings).

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect roof sheathing from moisture until roofing is installed.

END OF SECTION


BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Concealed building insulation and sound-attenuation batts.


1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for safing insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submit product data for each type of insulation specified.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

3. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storage, and protection during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, or approved equal:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:

CertainTeed Corporation Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation Johns Manville 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard

thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed in dices of 25 and 50, respectively.

B. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber insulation combining mineral fibers of type

described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed values of

25 and 50, respectively.

C. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.

D. Minimum Thermal Characteristics Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Walls: R-13.

2. Ceilings: R-30.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related Work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION



A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit

tightly around obstructions pipes, conduits, outlet boxes, and fill voids and small areas with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated.

E. Install insulation blankets at the following locations:

1. All new exterior and interior wall construction.

2. At existing exterior wall wood studs where existing finish is removed for new Work.

3. At all interior wall wood studs adjacent to unconditioned spaces, where existing finish is

removed for new Work.

4. At ceiling areas where specifically indicated on Drawings. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrate complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements.

1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more

than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug, neat fit between ends.

2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For wood-framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place.

D. Provide baffles at heat generating devices to maintain 3 inch clearance.

E. Provide permanent support for ceiling insulation where no finish ceiling occurs.

F. Provide sound-attenuation blankets that are the full thickness of the partition.



3.05 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION


ROOF PATCH & REPAIR 07250 - 1

SECTION 07250

ROOF PATCH & REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Install new roofing where removed for installation of new equipment and penetrations.

2. Flash in new curbs and penetrations.

3. Flash in existing curbs where equipment is removed.

4. Maintain existing warranty by applying manufacturer materials as required per manufacturer installation requirements.

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Flashings and Fastening: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:

1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details and recommendations.

2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and MSDS Sheets: For each type of product specified.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Product Certificate: Submit notarized certificate, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product names and numbers and manufacturers’ names, with



statement indicating that products to be provided meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer and Roofing Inspector. Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

2. Indicate that proposed system components are compatible.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

E. Inspection Reports: Daily reports of Roofing Inspector. Include weather conditions, description of work performed, tests performed, defective work observed, and corrective actions taken to correct defective work.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For built-up roofing to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years experience.

1. Installer must acquire five inspection service days utilizing manufacturer’s technical inspectors..

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for built-up roofing identical to that used for this Project. Or, if the roof is under pre-existing warranty, all products used to be that of the same manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain roofing system components from or approved in writing by roofing system manufacturer.

D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.



6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

E. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.




A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field measurements and material quantities:

1. Contractor shall have sole responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of material quantities and sizes, and site conditions that will affect work.

C. Waste Disposal:

1. Do not re-use, re-cycle or dispose of material manufacturers product containers except in accordance with all applicable regulations. The user of manufactured products is responsible for proper use and disposal of product containers.

D. Safety requirements:

1. All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements.

2. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements.

3. Maintain a crewman as a floor area guard whenever roof decking is being repaired or replaced.

4. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools, roofing kettles, fuels, solvents, torches, and open flames are being used.

1.10 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: 10 years Contractor Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis of Design: materials, manufacturer’s product designations, and/or manufacturer’s names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. All products are also ‘or equal’. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1 and performance requirements in Part 2.

B. If any work to be completed is to a roof under a pre-existing warranty, all products used are to be furnished by the manufacturer of the existing warranty.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS Garland Company, Inc.

3800 East 91st Street Cleveland, Ohio 44105 Telephone: (310) 367-7655 Miles Taylor



2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS

A. Base Sheet: Fiberlass reinforced SBS modified base sheet used as a base ply for torch applied membranes:

1. HPR Torch Base Sheet or equal.

2. Breaking Strength, minimum, ASTM D 146: machine direction, 210 lbf/in (22.5 kN/m);

3. Tear Strength, minimum, ASTM D 4073: machine direction, 250 lbf (880 N); cross machine direction, 200 lbf (880 N).

2.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLY SHEETS

A. Ply Sheet: Dual fiberglass reinforced SBS modified membrane for torch applied

1. Stressply IV Mineral or equal.



2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Base Flashing Sheet: Dual fiberglass reinforced SBS modified membrane for torch applied

1. Stressply IV Mineral or equal.



B. Primer: Primer capable of providing solid adhesion over monolithic emulsion existing coating.

1. Garla Prime VOC or equal.

C. Asphalt Roofing Mastic:

1. Flashing Bond or equal.

D. Urethane Coating: Applied for ponding areas and over coping cap seams.

1. White Star or equal.

2. Tensile: 2300 psi

3. Tear: 230 lbs/in

4. Elongation: 300%

E. Rust Proof Coating: Applied over all equipment to properly rustproof equipment

1. Rust Go VOC Top Coat White or equal.



F. Metal Roof Seam Tape:

1. Butyl Tape or equal.

G. Silicone sealant: manufacturer’s low modulus, high performance, one part moisture curing silicone joint sealant.

1. Tuff Stuff Natural White or equal.

2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer.

2.7 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Termination bar:

1. Aluminum bar:

a. 1/8 x 1 inch (3.2 x 25.4 mm).

B. Counterflashing and counterflashing extensions:

1. Twenty two (22) gauge galvanized.

C. Piping through roof box:

1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526-85, sheet steel with 1.25 oz./sq. (3.82 g/m2) Galvwash surfacing.

a. Gauge: Twenty- two (22).

b. Solder: ASTM B32-89, alloy grade 50A. Neutralize flux after soldering.

D. Work shall be in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, as issued by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc., (SMACNA).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Substrate inspection:

1. The Applicator shall inspect the substrate for defects such as excessive surface roughness, contamination, structural inadequacy, or any other condition that will adversely affect the quality of work.



2. The substrate shall be clean, smooth, dry, free of flaws, sharp edges, loose and foreign material, oil and grease. Roofing shall not start until all defects have been corrected.

3. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place.

4. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that the nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Protection:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of work. Lawns, shrubbery, paved areas, and building shall be protected from damage. Repair damage at no extra cost to Owner.

2. Roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and insulation shall be installed and sealed in a watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of inclement weather.

3. At start of each work day drains within daily work area shall be plugged. Plugs to be removed at end of each work day or before arrival of inclement weather.

4. Preparation work shall be limited to those areas that can be covered with installed roofing material on same day and before arrival of inclement weather.

5. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement. Move equipment and ground storage areas as work progresses.

6. Protect building surfaces at set-up areas with tarpaulin. Secure tarpaulin. Spilled or scattered debris shall be cleaned up immediately. Removed material to be disposed from roof as it accumulates.

7. At end of each working day, seal removal areas with water stops along edges to prevent water entry.

8. Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work area where aggregate/debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing membrane. Contractor shall instruct and police workmen to ensure that aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workmen's shoes or equipment wheels. Discovery of entrapped aggregate/debris within new membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection.



3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Have specification and product data sheets on the job site.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing built-up roofing system.

D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing mastic with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

E. Details not addressed in specification shall be in accordance with NRCA Manual Plates and recommendations, and the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, as issued by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc., (SMACNA).

F. Repair all deficiencies in the roof membrane and flashings including splits, holes, delaminated plies, and open corners with a five-course application of aluminum mastic and fiberglass reinforcement.

3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION OVER PONDING AREAS

A. Heat with a torch gun any reflective coating and peel away.

B. Prime cleaned roof areas and base flashings to be reinforced at a rate of 1 gal/200 sq ft and allow to dry.

C. Prior to application of surface treatment system, contractor shall inspect roof with manufacturer's representative.

1. Apply urethane coating at 4 gal per sq in two separate coats (2 gal per sq each coat). Embed 400 lbs of Title 24 gravel into the coating.

3.5 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION WHERE ROOFING IS REMOVED

A. Cut a clean edge and prime the roof system around the area removed. Install new deck supports and plywood as necessary to provide a sound substrate for the installation of new roofing.

B. Mechanically fasten a Type II base sheet.

C. Prime the existing roof 1’ in all directions around the area. If a reflective coating is present on the roof field, heat and remove the coating prior to applying the torch flashing.



D. Torch apply a base sheet and extend onto the roof field 9”. Torch apply a cap sheet and extend onto the roof 12”.

E. Coat the new flashing area with White Knight Plus WC or equal at 2 gal per sq.

F. Allow the material to dry for 24 hrs.

G. Coat the new flashing area with White Knight Plus WC or equal at 2 gal per sq.

3.6 FLASHING

A. General flashing requirements:

1. Base flashing height:

a. Not less than 8 inches without manufacturer’s written approval. If height of base flashing exceeds 24 inches, a battan bar with TF tape must be installed at the midpoint of the sheet. Heat weld a strip of TPA over the batten bar.

B. Curb flashings (new):

1. Curbs must be a minimum of 18” from any other flashing detail.

a. Secure substrate board to metal curbs

2. Install new roofing and cant strip around curb. Torch apply base sheet and cap sheet.

3. Extend onto the roof field 1’. Prime existing roof field prior to torch application. If a reflective coating is present on the roof field, heat and remove the coating prior to applying the torch flashing.

4. Coat the new flashing area with White Knight Plus WC or equal at 2 gal per sq.

5. Allow the material to dry for 24 hrs.


7. Seal all holes, screws, and penetrations on equipment with polyurethane sealant.

C. Wall flashings

1. Adhere cant strip to flashing base in a continuous application of adhesive.

2. Install new roofing. Torch apply base sheet and cap sheet.

3. Extend onto the roof field 1’. Prime existing roof field prior to torch application. If a reflective coating is present on the roof field, heat and remove the coating prior to applying the torch flashing.






7. Secure top edge of flashing membrane to vertical substrate with termination bar and butyl tape. Where possible extend over the top of parapet wall.

8. Caulk top of bar with polyurethane sealant.

9. Seal corners and any kick-holes over all flashings with a five-course application of Aluminum mastic and fiberglass reinforcement.

10. Re-secure any loose base flashing using skirt metal counterflashing secured at 8” o.c..

D. Plumbing vents and pipe penetrations

1. Penetrations must be a minimum of 18” from any other flashing detail.

2. Install new lead flashing for the penetration. Set in mastic.

3. Prime the surface of the flashing. Torch apply new cap sheet 1’ in all directions of the penetration. If a reflective coating is present on the roof field, heat and remove the coating prior to applying the torch flashing.




7. Clamp and caulk the penetration. Install umbrellas to counterflash.

8. Five-course edge the base of the penetration.

E. Coping:

1. Wire brush coping seams, top of coping that terminates on the horizontal, and rusted areas to remove contaminants.

a. Remove loose or failed self-adhering membrane.

2. Prime the metal.

3. Coat with urethane White Star at 2 gal per sq.

F. Drains:

1. Contractor is to complete a water test of all drain plumbing prior to new roof installation. If any drainage problems are discovered, notify the Architect in writing prior to installing roof system.

2. Remove existing roof drain assemblies and overflow pipes and install new 12” Zurn, or equivalent, cast iron roof drain and overflow drain bowl assemblies with outlets matching existing plumbing. Construct new sumps for drain and overflow drain. Connect to existing or install new plumbing per architect’s plan.

3. Install new clamping ring and cast iron drain screen. Follow drain manufacturer’s installation instructions.



4. Test all drains for proper flow and water tightness. Correct defects.

G. Install walkway strips set in solvent free mastic under any new duct supports.

H. New Pipe/conduits sitting on roofs shall be set on and clamped to new rubber blocks with steel channels.

1. Support lines every 10 feet on pipe runs along with support on each side of every union, junction, and direction change.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Owner.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION


FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

SECTION 07600

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Supply and install flashings gutters, downspouts and other sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections, but required to prevent penetration of water through exterior shell of building.

B. Work under this Section that is to be built into or connected with roofing work, shall be

coordinated so that connections, flashings and like items will provide a water and weathertight installation.


A. Section 07311: Fiberglass Shingle Roofing

B. Section 07320: Clay Tile Roofing

C. Section 07525: Modified Bituminous Roofing.

D. Section 07526: Torch Grade Modified Bitumen Roofing.

E. Section 07530: Single Ply Roofing.

F. Section 07560: Roof Maintenance and Repairs

G. Section 07570: Coated Foamed Roofing

H. Section 07700: Roof Specialties and Accessories.

I. Section 07920: Sealants and Calking. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating construction, thickness of materials, methods of joining, reinforcement and anchorage features of sheet metal work and adjacent work. Provide complete information regarding concealed joints.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Unless otherwise specified, install all work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual:


A. Materials shall conform to following standards:



1. Standard Specifications for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip process, General Requirements, ASTM A653.

2. Federal Specifications for Copper Flat Products, Slit and Edge Rolled QQ-C-576 B (1). 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protect sheet metal materials before, during and after installation. Protect installed work of other trades. Do not install bent or damaged materials.


A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653. Galvanized coating shall be 1.25 oz. per square foot "commercial".

B. Copper Plate, Sheet and Strip: F S QQ-C-576 B-(1). Copper sheet and strip shall be cold-

rolled, light-temper.

C. Sheet Lead: F S QQ-L-201 F (2) Grade B, except that bismuth content shall be 0.025 percent, maximum.

D. Stainless Steel: Plate, sheet and strip shall conform to ASTM A167, Type 302 or Type 316 No. 4

finish on exposed surfaces and No. 2 finish on concealed surfaces. Unless otherwise specified or indicated use Type 302.

E. Fastenings:

1. Galvanized Steel: Nails, rivets, and other fastenings used in connection with galvanized

sheet steel work shall be sealed with rust resistive coating. Rivets shall be tinned. Nails and other fastenings shall be zinc-coated.

2. Copper: Nails, rivets, and other fastenings used in connection with copper sheet metal

work, shall be made from hard-temper copper or hard brass.

3. Stainless Steel: Nails, rivets and other fastenings used in connection with stainless steel work, shall be 300 series alloy to match alloy of stainless steel being attached.

F. Soldering Flux: Raw Muriatic Acid for galvanized steel; rosin for tin, lead and tinned copper;

non-corrosive soldering salts for uncoated copper and acid-type flux formulated for soldering stainless steel.

G. Solder Metal: ASTM B32, Grade 50A. Name of product manufacturer and grade designation

shall be stamped or cast onto each bar. 2.02 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Accurately form sheet metal work to dimensions and shapes detailed. Cope all finish molded and broken shapes with true, straight, sharp lines and angles and, where intersecting each other, to a precise fit. Unless otherwise specified, all galvanized sheet steel shall be #22 gage. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall have a 1/2" minimum hemmed edge.



2. Soldering of sheet steel or copper shall be done slowly with well-heated copper soldering iron or soldering torch, joints full-flowing, to be made neat and consistent with joints so formed. Thoroughly clean materials at joints before soldering, and tin coppers prior to soldering. Exposed soldering on finished surfaces shall be scraped smooth. Lock seam work shall be made flat and true to line and soldered along its entire length. Acid-fluxed work shall be washed thoroughly with a soap, soda and water solution after soldering.

3. Form and install sheet metal work to provide proper allowances for expansion and

contraction, without causing undue stresses in any part of completed work. Installation shall be water and weathertight throughout.

B. Gutters and Downspouts:

1. Gutters: Fabricate from 22 gauge galvanized steel to match existing size and design

unless otherwise indicated. Drain gutter towards nearest downspout and provide a expansion joint at mid-point between downspout outlets, but not to exceed 50 feet o. c.. Rivet all joints and ends with a minimum of 6 rivets per joint or maximum rivet spacing not to exceed 1 ½” o.c.. Sweat solder from inside of gutter and in horizontal position where possible. Neatly fit downspouts to gutter by a slip joint. Gutters shall be sectioned prior to placing. Soldering iron or torch shall be sufficiently hot to draw solder between surfaces to be joined.

2. Form and install sheet metal work so as to provide proper allowances for expansion and

contraction without causing undue stresses in any part of the completed work. Installation shall be finish water tight throughout.

3. Downspouts: Fabricate new downspouts of 4”round #16 gauge steel tubing with butt

joints and mitered elbows to match existing downspouts or sized as indicated on plans. Downspout shall be fabricated with elbows at bottom where they spill onto paving; splash blocks, splash pans or shall be fitted into drains as indicated. All joint and elbows shall be sealed with a continuous weld. Galvanize all downspouts after fabrication in the largest section possible.

4. Outlets: place a 20 gauge galvanized band 3/4” wide over outlet opening, on center,

lapping 1” over each side and hot soldered. Galvanize all bands before installing.

C. Conductor Heads:

1. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads and downspouts of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel as detailed. Cover tops of the conductor heads with 1/4” mesh, No 22 gauge galvanized wire mesh, neatly cut around roof outlets and solder securely to tops of the conductor head.

D. Gravel Stops: Provide #24 gage galvanized sheet steel gravel stops wherever roof area

drops to a lower level; at the eaves and rake of roof, where roof comes to an abrupt edge, and where indicated. Stops shall be of height indicated and shall be made with 2 flanges. Horizontal flange shall be not less than 4" wide, and vertical flange shall extend down over vertical surfaces of trim or gutter. Gravel stops shall lap 4" at ends and corners, and shall be made by cutting and lapping horizontal flanges. Contact surfaces of lapped flanges, including raised areas and corners, shall be completely covered with flashing compound.

E. Overflow Outlets: Provide galvanized sheet steel overflow outlets at locations and of sizes

indicated. Outlets shall extend through full thickness of wall in one continuous piece and completely line opening. On outside face of wall, top and sides of outlet shall finish 1/2" on



surface of wall. Bottom of outlet shall project 1-1/2" beyond face of wall, and shall be bent down slightly. On inside face, side and bottom flanges shall extend not less than 8" beyond edge of opening, and at top not less than 6". Outlets shall be set at time roof is being laid.

F. Reglet Type Counterflashing: Where roof comes in contact with vertical surfaces, provide

counterflashing. Set top of counterflashing 8" above roof deck unless otherwise indicated, and extend down at least 5". Counterflashing and reglet shall be #22 gage galvanized sheet steel equal to "Springlok" by Fry Reglet Corp. Lap counterflashing and reglet 3" minimum at splices and miter at angles, or supply special metal corner fittings. Reglet and method of securing flashing shall be so constructed that flashing is firmly locked in place, but may be readily removed for replacement.

G. Pitch Pockets: Provide galvanized steel, open-bottom pitch pockets with 6" wide flanges and 4"

high collar, in locations indicated.

H. Splash Pans: Provide splash pans for all downspouts which empty onto lower roofs. Pans shall be galvanized sheet steel 12" by 18", unless otherwise indicated, and turned up 2" on 3 sides.

I. Miscellaneous Flashing: Unless otherwise indicated, miscellaneous flashing shall be fabricated

of galvanized steel. Exterior doors and windows, unless covered by overhangs shall be flashed with #22 gage galvanized steel as detailed. At wood construction, nail flashing to framing before paper backed lath is installed.

J. Sheet Metal Roofing at Outside Storage Units: Cover outside storage unit roof with #26 gage

galvanized sheet steel as indicated. Turn metal under edge at top, hem 1/2", and secure with countersunk, flathead wood screws, spaced at 12" on centers.

K. Sheet Metal Wall Covering: Wall surfaces, where indicated, shall be covered with sheet

metal to height indicated. Metal covering shall be #24 gage galvanized sheet steel, with joints between sheets occurring only over studs. Joints locked together and rolled flat. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall be hemmed at least 1/2". Nail sheets in field along studding at 12" on center, and at top and bottom edges and seams at 4" on center, using 3d galvanized nails for all nailing.

L. Roof Pipe Flashings: Provide welded seam #4 lead flashings. Field fabricated flashings

shall also be welded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Concrete and masonry materials in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with alkali resistant coating, such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Wood in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with 2 coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Gutters and Downspouts:

1. Anchor gutters to structure with No. 10 gauge steel straps, galvanize after fabricating. Secured straps with galvanized fasteners. 36" O.C.. Drill pilot holes and use #12 x 2” pan head screws to eliminate splitting fascia.

2. Install 1/4" galvanized wire mesh continuous cover on gutter where indicated.



3. Secure downspouts to walls with 1/8" x 2" steel straps, galvanized after fabrication.

Block downspouts out 1/2" from the finish wall surfaces. Secure straps to wall framing with 1/4"x 20 x 2” long galvanized expansion anchors or equal for concrete and masonry wall. Use ¼”-20 toggle bolts on stucco wall. Plastic anchors will not be allowed for anchoring downspouts. For steel columns with attached brackets, use similar fasteners or as detailed.

4. Anchor conductor heads to walls with 1/4" x 2 1/2" galvanized lag screws or 1/4" - 20

expansion anchor bolts.

B. Install clean-outs as needed on cast iron drains.

C. Repair damaged wood and restore to its original condition as needed, per District determination.

D. Trim trees as needed.

E. Counterflashing:

1. Materials are to be on site at start of roofing operation, to ensure that roofing is not delayed

or interrupted. 2. Install at constant horizontal elevation across roof slope and slope at constant height above

cant along rake edges. 3. Provide minimum 3" lap at all end splices of reglets and counterflashing.

F. Galvanized sheet steel parapet coping and flashing shall be continuous over top of parapet to

form a watertight cap, with standing seams at approximately 8'-0" on center, as detailed. Nails shall be galvanized, and exposed nails shall have lead washers. Corners and angles shall be lapped and soldered. (Do not caulk these joints).

3.03 TESTING

A. Upon request of District Inspector, demonstrate by means of a hose or standing water, that all flashing and sheet metal is completely watertight.

END OF SECTION


JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in concrete.

b. Perimeter joints at frames of doors, windows, and openings.

c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints at concrete slabs.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.

b. Tile control and expansion joints, if any.

c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and

windows.

d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

e. Other joints as indicated.

4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring, if any.

b. Other joints as indicated.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for fire-resistive building joint-sealant systems.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.

3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions.



1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submit product data for each joint-sealant product.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose Work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

their deterioration or damage to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants

capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL



A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

1. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent material, except if two materials are

present, obtain color selection from Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemical curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.05 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to

control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.

2. Type O: Open-cell material.

3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.

4. Type: Any material indicated above, provided it is compatible with sealant and materials adjacent.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backing: Neoprene, Butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.



B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint

sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.



C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at positions required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. Do not allow 3-sided bond of sealants.

E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installation with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original Work.

3.06 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant (ES-1): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following, or approved equal:

790; Dow Corning. Silpruf; GE Silicones. UltraPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones. HiFlex 331; NUCO Industries, Inc. NuFlex 309; NUCO Industries, Inc. VP 275; Ohio Sealants, Inc. 864; Pecora Corporation. 890; Pecora Corporation. PSI-641; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Omniseal; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. Spectrum 1; Tremco.

a. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

b. Class: 25.

c. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

d. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

e. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C

1248.

f. Applications: Use for exterior vertical surfaces where sealant is not to be painted.

B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant (ES-2): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures or high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:


786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).



3. Class: 25.

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated O.

6. Applications: Use at plumbing fixtures.

C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES-3): Where joint sealants of this type are

indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following or equal: Chem-Calk 2641; Bostik Inc. Vulkem 227; Mameco International. Vulkem 922; Mameco International. Elasto-Thane 920 Gun Grade; Pacific Polymers, Inc. Dynatred; Pecora Corporation. PSI-270; Polymeric Systems, Inc. NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25.

4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

6. Applications: Use for exterior and interior joints subject to vehicle or pedestrian traffic.

D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES-4): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Inc. Chem-Calk 915; Bostik Inc. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corp. Sikaflex - 1a; Sika Corporation. NP 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. Dy Monic; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25.

4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated O.

6. Applications: Use for vertical exterior surfaces where painting is required.

3.07 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE



A. Latex Sealant (LS-1): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products

complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following, or approved equal: Chem-Calk 600; Bostik, Inc. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications: Use for interior sealants in vertical surfaces that are to be painted.

END OF SECTION


ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-1

SECTION 08520

ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY


1. Solid and tubular aluminum extruded windows of the following type(s):

Picture Window Series 710, B. Related Sections:

1. 07920 – Joint Sealant. 2. 09260 – Gypsum Board Systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures; submit following items:

1. Product Data.

2. Shop Drawings: Include window schedule, window elevations, sections and details, and multiple window assembly details.

3. Samples:

a. Color samples: Minimum 1x4 inch (25x100 mm) samples of Aluminum with

painted or anodized color. b. Glass, showing specified tint color.

4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Qualifications: Proof of manufacturer's qualifications. b. U-Factor and structural rating charts required for AAMA and NFRC labeling

requirements. c. Installation Instructions – AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange Installation”) or

AAMA 2410 (“Flush Fin Installation”).

B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals; submit following items:

1. Temporary window labels marked to identify windows that labels were applied to.

2. Maintenance instructions.

3. Special Warranties.




A. Overall Standards: Comply with ANSI/AAMA 101.I.S.2, except as otherwise noted herein. B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications:

a. Minimum five years’ experience in producing aluminum windows of the

type(s) specified.

b. Member AAMA, NFRC.

C. Regulatory Requirements: D. Certifications for insulated glass windows:

1. AAMA: Windows shall be Gold Label certified with label attached to frame per AAMA

requirements. 2. NFRC: Windows shall be NFRC certified with temporary U-factor label applied to

glass and an NFRC tab added to permanent AAMA frame label. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Reference section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions on label applied to windows.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Commercial Special Warranty:

1. 10-year guarantee.

2. Guarantee windows against defects in manufacturing and workmanship including costs for parts and labor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc. Tel: 1.800.MILGARD (645-4273) 1010 54th Avenue East (253) 922-2030 Tacoma, WA 98424 Fax: (253) 926-0848 Web: milgard.com

1. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1 st Windows Tel: (562) 494-9069 2633 E. 28th Street, Ste 610 Fax: (562) 494-2069 Signal Hill, CA 90755 Email: [email protected]

B. Window Series: Milgard Aluminum Windows Series 710

http://www.milgard.com/



2.02 MATERIALS

Aluminum: Comply with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, 6063-T5 temper for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish.

Extruded frame members are to be .060” in thickness for structural walls. 2.03 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Thermal Performance: Comply with NFRC 100. B. Air Leakage, Water Resistance, Structural Test: Comply with ANSI/AAMA 101/I.S.2. C. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with ASTM E 588.

2.04 WINDOW TYPES:

A. Picture Window– [710 Series, 1 inch (25mm) nail fin setback]:

1. Frame: a. 710 Series, 2 1/16” (52mm) & 2 3/8” (60mm) 2. Sightlines: a. 1185H & 1285H Series, equal to the horizontal slider and single hung 3. Performance Class:

a. 710 Series, 95 ½” x 71 ½” and smaller: FW-HC40

4. Hardware:

a. Operators will be of single push arm design driven by a hand crank. Constructed of hardened steel worm and gearing and high-pressure zinc alloy die castings with high-strength plastic trim cover.

b. Cam style locking mechanism with latch on jamb. c. Tension adjustable hinge.

5. Weatherstripping: Dual durometer vinyl bulb seal.

2.05 GLAZING

A. Single Pane Glass:

1. Glazing Type: [Clear] 2. Thickness: 1 / 4”

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames and sash with mechanically joined corners. Corners are fastened with corrosion resistant screws and sealed with an acrylic sealant.



C. All fixed glass is exterior glazed and all sashes are marine glazed with flexible PVC glazing. The fixed glazing shall be removed without disassembly of a sash. The vents will need to be disassembled to replace the glazing.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Frame and Sash Color: [White] [Tan] Painted Exterior Finish: Equaling 0.3 mils dry film thickness to AAMA 603.8-92.

B. Frame and Sash Color: [Bronze] [Clear] Anodized Exterior Finish: Provide AA-C22-A32

Class II Bronze or AA-C22-A31 Class II Clear finish, minimum 0.4 mils thick, electrolytically deposited color anodized finish.

C. Color match screen frame to window frame and sash color. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Windows inspected in accordance with manufacturer’s Quality Control Program as required by AAMA Gold Label certification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings in which windows will be installed.

1. Verify that framing complies with AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange Installation”) or AAMA 2410 (“Flush Fin Installation”).

2. Verify that fasteners in framed walls are fully driven and will not interfere with window

installation. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install windows in framed walls in accordance with AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange Installation”) or AAMA 2410 (“Flush Fin Installation”).

B. Do not remove temporary labels.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Reference Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. B. Remove temporary labels and retain for Closeout Submittals. C. Clean soiled surfaces and glass using a mild detergent and warm water solution with soft,

clean cloths.

END OF SECTION


DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SECTION INCLUDES:

1. Work under this section comprises the furnishing and installation of hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified hardware components, systems and controls.

2. Related Documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1.

3. Items include but are not limited to the following:

a. Hinges

b. Exit Devices

c. Locksets

d. Push/Pull Plates

e. Auto Flush Bolts

f. Closers

g. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates

h. Stops and Overhead Controls

i. Thresholds, Gasketing and Door Bottoms

j. Miscellaneous Accessories and Trim

B. RELATED WORK:

1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Work.

3. Section 09900 – Painting.

1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. References to specific products are used to establish minimum standards of utility and quality. Unless otherwise approved, furnish only the specified products.

B. Requests for substitutions to be in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. Proposed substitutions must be submitted in writing and hand delivered to the Architect. Approvals must be by addendum ten [10] days prior to bid opening.

C. All requests to be accompanied by two [2] copies of the manufacturer's brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish.

D. Items listed with no substitute have been requested by the Building Owner to match existing building standards.



E. Should the Contractor make any substitutions without the written consent of the Architect, Contractor shall remove all substituted hardware, replacing same with the hardware as specified and at no additional cost to the building owner.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. References specified in this section subject to compliance as directed and shall meet requirements of Federal, State and local codes having jurisdiction over this project including:

1. CCR - California Code of Regulations Title 24.

2. ANSI-A 117.1- Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

3. ADA - American Disabilities Act - Title III - Public Accommodations.

4. UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.

5. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.

6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety.

7. ITS - Intertek Testing Service [Warnock Hersey].

8. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

9. ANSI/BHMA A156 Product Listing.

10. CBC - California Building Code, Local Codes and the Authority having Jurisdiction.

11. UL 10C for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies and UBC 7-2.

B. Hardware that is furnished and/or installed that does not meet code requirements, shall be removed and replaced with correct material at no additional expense to the District.


A. PRODUCT UNIFORMITY: Except where specified, all hinges, keyed cylinders, electro-mechanical components, locksets, latch sets, exit devices, closers, overhead stop/holders and component parts shall be furnished by one manufacturer.

B. RATED OPENINGS: Hardware used in labeled fire or smoke rated openings to be listed for those types of openings and bear the identifying label or mark indicating U.L. [Underwriter's Laboratories] approved for fire. Exit devices in non-labeled openings to be listed for panic.

C. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross referenced and coordinated to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL 10C- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. SUPPLIER: Shall be responsible for detailing hardware that meets project standards and where appropriate, retrofit applications which requires inspection of openings prior to detailing and ordering respective hardware items.

E. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: Prior to installation of hardware, arrange a conference between supplier, installers, and related trades to review materials, procedures, hardware mounting locations and related work.



F. INSTALLATION EXERCISE: Contractor/Installer is required to install one complete exterior opening Hardware Set and the respective hollow metal door and frame to establish both know-ledge and skill as required for this project. Door/frame and hardware installation practice will be coordinated with the Project Architect and Building Owner’s Representative, and shall be accomplished to the PA’s satisfaction, and prior to the installation of any doors/frames and door hardware. Typical hardware set to be comprised of hinges, panic device, trim, door closer, overhead stop if detailed, flat goods, threshold, sweep, drip cap and perimeter seal or as directed by the Architect.

1. Damage resulting in replacement material or repair, including labor, shall be absorbed by the Contractor/Installer.

G. POST-INSTALLATION POLICING: Will be required by the Hardware Supplier, Contractor and Architect to determine compliance with the hardware specification and building standards.

H. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS:

1. Hardware supplier must be a recognized, Southern California based FACTORY DIRECT contract distributor with a minimum five (5) years experience specializing in institutional grade builders hardware of the type specified herein. Distributor's with less than two (2) years of history of furnishing builders hardware in the project's vicinity will not be acceptable.

2. Supplier must have in his/her employment on a full time basis, a Certified Hardware Consultant [AHC] or person of equal experience who is acceptable to the Architect and GC. This individual shall be available for consultation and service to the architect, contractor, and building owner during construction and on an ongoing consulting service to the building owner following the completion of the project.

3. Supplier who does not maintain personnel in a permanent facility within a reasonable driving radius of the project area for consultation and service with the Architect, Contractor and Building Owner will not be acceptable.

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. COORDINATION: Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Any part of the finish hardware required by the frame or door manufacturers or other suppliers, that is needed in order to produce doors or frames is to be sent to those suppliers in a timely manner.

C. DEFECTIVE HARDWARE: All hardware shall be new and free from defects affecting both serviceability and appearance. Working parts shall be properly fitted, smooth working and without excessive play.

D. FUNCTION/MODIFICATION:

1. Should any hardware fail to meet the intended operational requirements or require any modification to suit the intended location, this matter, or any other necessary advance information, shall be brought to the attention of the architect for correction or advice in ample time to avoid delay in the manufacture and delivery of the hardware.

2. Modifications to specified hardware, required by reason of construction characteristics, shall be furnished in the specified operational, functional features, quality and finish. Modifications shall be subject to acceptance of the Architect at no additional cost to the Building Owner.



3. Items of hardware not specified herein but necessary for completion of the work shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. Such items shall be of the type specified and comparable to adjacent hardware.

E. DOORS AND FRAMES: Hollow metal and wood doors shall be manufactured to templates. If required, physical hardware items shall be furnished to related manufacturers in sufficient time to avoid delay in work.

F. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION: Before electrically controlled or operated hardware is ordered, voltages and wiring details shall be coordinated with the contractor and related trades.

G. EXISTING OPENINGS [MODERNIZATION - EACH SITE]

1. Contractor is responsible for a field survey of doors, frames and hardware to determine compatibility of specified hardware, including, but not limited to: locksets, panic devices, strikes, automatic flushbolts, overhead stops, coordinators, closers, threshold/seal, hinge sizes & weights including wide throw hinges.

2. Unless directed otherwise, Contractor to modify openings to meet ADA elevation threshold requirements. Contractor to survey and where necessary, furnish and install ADA approved ramp threshold systems where applicable and approved by the Architect. Work shall comply with minimum ADA specifications as well as create a flat sub-surface for specified thresholds.

3. Existing doors and frames to be modified for hardware as permitted by UL, WHI and local code authority. Where required, Contractor shall cut and weld necessary reinforcements to existing jambs and doors, for listed hardware as applicable and required. Contractor to patch, sand and repaint/refinish reused door(s) and frame(s) surfaces affected by the removal of hardware, and any modification for replacement hardware.

4. Whether listed or not, Contractor shall furnish frame/door hinge, strike, lock face, panic, closer and overhead auxiliary stop fillers where required for a clean finished appearance. Related costs to field modify existing frames and/doors shall be part of the Contractor's base bid.

5. An additional allowance of $20.00 each existing [reused] modified door and frame opening will be part of the Contractor’s base bid. This allowance will be allocated to the hardware supplier for time invested in the required field survey and engineering necessary for detailing a complete and accurate hardware schedule. Contractor to allow for the above dollar amounts in the base bid [modernization projects only].

6. Intertek Testing Service inspection and certification is required for the labeling of non-rated doors and frames, and the modification of any labeled door and frame. Contractor is responsible for contacting and coordinating required labeling service.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Submit typewritten copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. Schedule to be in VERTICAL format, listing each door opening including; location, handing of opening, all hardware scheduled for each opening or otherwise required to allow for proper function of door opening as intended, finish of hardware, and respective manufacturers. Doors with closers or door controls shall require the degree of door opening.

1. Supply six [6] copies of the schedules within fifteen [15] working days from date of purchase order.

a. The hardware schedule shall conform with DHI's: "RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR PROCESSING HARDWARE SCHEDULES AND TEMPLATES."



b. Submit manufacturers' catalog cut sheets of all hardware items scheduled and any required special mounting instructions with the hardware schedule.

c. Include recommended mounting location data for each type of scheduled door hardware.

2. No hardware item shall be delivered until the hardware schedule has been approved by the Project Architect.

3. Approval of the hardware schedule by the Architect does not relieve the hardware supplier from the responsibility of furnishing the job complete.

B. SAMPLES:

1. If directed by the Architect, submit physical samples of each item of hardware proposed in work.

2. Samples will be returned on the request of and at the expense of the Contractor.

C. MFR'S CATALOG ILLUSTRATIONS AND HARDWARE DATA:

1. Hardware Supplier shall submit, to the Architect, two [2] catalog cuts of every item of hardware furnished for this project. Data shall be contained in a binder appropriately divided by the respective manufacturers.

2. Cuts shall include manufacturer's illustrations and shall identify finishes, sizes and product numbers. Abbreviations to be fully explained.

D. OPERATIONAL DATA [EACH SITE]:

1. Deliver to the District, through the Architect,

a. One [1] set of factory catalogues of approved hardware.

b. One [1] copy factory generated bitting list.

c. One [1] copy of approved door hardware shop drawings.

d. One [1] copy of door hardware specifications.

e. Furnish fifty (50) key blanks of each section furnished.

E. TEMPLATES: Templates for door hardware items to be sent to related door and frame suppliers within three [3] working days of receipt of approved hardware schedule. Templates shall not be issued until the door hardware schedule has been reviewed and approved by the Project Architect.

F. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE: Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to any or all of these specifications as required.

G. KEYING SCHEDULE:

1. Furnished by Best Lock Company in coordination with the District.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. PACKAGING: Each unit of hardware shall be individually packaged in the manufacturer's original containers as required by the respective hardware manufacturers.

1. Packaging shall include factory original installation instructions, fastenings and all items necessary for complete installation.



B. WRAPPING: Wrap & cushion each item to prevent scratches & dents during delivery & storage.

C. ENVIRONMENTAL PACKAGING: Hardware shipped to the jobsite is to be packaged in biodegradable packs, such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping. If non-biodegradable packing is utilized, such as plastic, plastic bags or Styrofoam, then the Contractor will be responsible for the disposal of the non-biodegradable packing to a licensed or authorized collector for recycling of the material.

D. MARKINGS: Each package shall be clearly marked on the outside, identifying contents with specific opening number corresponding to those listed in the hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each product.

E. DELIVERY: Except as dictated otherwise, deliver all hardware to the job site. The Contractor and Hardware Supplier's Representative shall check each item of hardware against the approved finish hardware schedule.

F. STORAGE: All hardware shall be stored in a locked storage space until ready for installation. Hardware shall be protected against damage after application and during construction period.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. With the exception of the following products, door hardware shall be supplied with a one [1] year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of job:

1. Cylindrical Locks T-Zone 11L: Seven (7) years.

2. Mortise Locks 8200 Series: Five (5) years.

3. Exit Devices 80 Series: Five (5) years.

4. Exit Devices 30 Series: Three (3) years.

5. Door Closers 351 Series: Ten (10) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCT:

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

1. All materials or products specified herein shall be furnished AS SPECIFIED. Refer to Para. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS.

Following are approved manufacturers for this work which comprise the bid: PRODUCT SPECIFIED MFRS APPROVED MFRS Hinge McKinney Stanley, Hager Continuous Hinge McKinney As Specified Keying System Best As Specified Lockset Sargent As Specified Exit Device Sargent As Specified Closer Sargent LCN4041 Push/Pull/KP Trimco BBW, Quality Flush bolt Trimco BBW, Quality Door Control Trimco BBW, Quality O.H. Stop Sargent As Specified Door Stop Trimco BBW, Quality Threshold/Seal Pemko Nat’l Gd, Reese



2.02 FASTENINGS

A. Furnish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts or other fastenings of suitable type and size to anchor the hardware in position for long life and heavy use. Fasteners shall include expansion shields, sex bolts, toggle bolts, or other approved anchors according to material to which it is applied and as recommended by the respective manufacturers.

1. Furnish Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated.

2. Thru-bolts to be supplied for panics, closers and overhead stops or as listed.

3. Furnish Security Head screws at exterior as listed.

B. Design of all fastenings shall harmonize with hardware as to material and finish.

2.03 HINGES

A. All butt hinges to be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity and consideration of warranty.

B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish five-knuckle as specified; button tip, full mortise template type hinges with non-rising loose pins.

C. Out-swinging exterior doors to be furnished with hinges of solid bronze with non-removable pins.

D. Interior doors to be furnished with wrought steel, polished and plated to match specified finish.

E. Furnish three [3] hinges up to 90 inches high and one [1] additional hinge for every 30 inches or fraction thereof.

F. Furnish standard weight hinges on doors up to 36 inches in width, and extra heavy weight on doors exceeding 36", or as indicated in the hardware schedule.

G. Furnish 4.5 x 4.5 inch for all 1-3/4 inch thick doors up to 36 inch wide, and 5 x 4.5 over 36 inch wide. Doors over 1-3/4 inch thru 2-1/4 inch thick, use 5 x 5 inch hinges. Where required furnish wide throw. Contractor to field measure each opening to determine exact hinge size and weight, including any “wide throw” requirements.

H. Where required, furnish hinges of sufficient width to clear trim and/or permit the door to swing 180 degrees as required by the specific opening

I. Furnish ball bearing hinges at all doors with door closers and/or overhead stops.

J. All hinges to be available in clear and dark bronze anodized finish as specified.

2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. All hinges to be non-handed and reversible.

B. Hinge line to be available in concealed flush mount with or without inset, full surface and half surface types as specified in the hardware sets. Furnish wide throw hinges as required to clear trim permitting doors to open 180 degrees.

C. All hinges to be made of extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy with polyacetal thrust bearing.

D. All concealed hinges to be fire-rated 20,45 and 90 minutes when incorporated into proper door and frame labeled installations, without necessitating the use of fusible link pins.

E. All concealed hinges to be available in standard, heavy and extra heavy-duty weight, all full surface and wide throw hinges as specified in the hardware sets.

F. All hinges to be factory cut for door size.



G. Contractor to field measure each opening to determine height and any “wide throw” requirements.

2.05 MORTISE LOCKS

A. All mortise locks, cylindrical locks and trim to be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Locksets shall be Sargent 72-8200 Series x LNJ trim. WTJ trim may be used at cylindrical lock retrofit of existing interior doors where occurring.

C. All lockset functions shall be manufactured in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge steel minimum the case shall be closed on all sides and back. The lockset shall have a field-adjustable, beveled armored front, with a .125-inch thickness minimum the lockset shall be 2 3/4 inch backset standard, with a one piece 3/4 inch throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt. The deadbolt shall be a full one-inch throw made of stainless steel and have 2 hardened steel roller inserts.

D. Lever return springs shall be internal. Springs used for leveling and lever return shall not be located outside of the lock case. Return springs shall not be located in the exterior rose or trim.

E. Full lever retraction at only 30 degrees for ADA accommodation.

F. Handing shall be field reversible without opening the lock case.

G. Mortise locksets for labeled fire doors shall have a fusible link mechanism to prevent latchbolt retraction in case of fire.

H. Provide curve lip strikes with wrought boxes for all locks. Strikes shall be of sufficient length to protect trim or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors.

2.06 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS

A. All cylindrical locksets to be Sargent 72-11LJ T-Zone Series at reused hollow metal doors templated for cylindrical locksets only. All other doors to receive 8200 Mortise.

2.07 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

A. Hardware shall be as listed in the hardware sets.

2.08 EXIT DEVICES

A. All exit devices and lever trim to be of one manufacturer as listed and in the hardware sets for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Exit devices shall be Sargent 72-43-80 Series x ETJ trim, and 1096HASP/1097HASP as listed.

C. Exit devices to be "UL" listed for life safety. All exit devices for labeled doors shall have "UL" label for "Fire Exit Hardware". All devices mounted on labeled wood doors are to be thru-bolted or per the manufacturer's listing requirements. All devices to conform to NFPA 80 and 101 requirements.

D. All exit devices to be of a heavy duty, chassis mounting design, with one piece removable covers, eliminating necessity of removing the device from the door for standard maintenance.

E. All trim to be thru-bolted to the lock stile case.

F. Lever trim to be the same as specified with mortise locksets.

G. Exit devices shall be push pad devices finished to match that of the locksets. Push pad to be high impact resistant black lexan with a maximum 3 inch projection.



H. Rail assemblies of all exit devices to be of brass or bronze base material, plated to standard architectural finishes or solid stainless steel and as required in the hardware schedule.

I. Removable Mullions to be heavy duty steel 12-L980 x Cylinder Latching.

2.09 CLOSERS

A. All closers to be the product of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Closers shall be Sargent 351 Series x P10/PH10/CPS/CPSH and as specified.

C. Closers shall be heavy duty, surface mounted, hydraulic type, with high strength cast case. Full rack and pinion constructed of heavy steel.

D. Size all closers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at the building site.

E. Closers to have adjustable spring power, which allows for closer sizing. Closers to have separate tamper resistant, non-critical regulating screw valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck control as standard features.

F. Closer arms to be forged steel, interchangeable with all closers specified on this project for simplification of future Owner maintenance considerations.

G. Supply appropriate arm assembly for each closer so that closer body and arm are mounted on non-public side of door opening and on the interior side of exterior openings, except where otherwise detailed.

H. Furnish closers with special application and heavy-duty arms as specified in the hardware schedule or as otherwise called for to insure a proper-operating, long-lasting opening. Heavy-duty arms shall have a cast iron heavy-duty soffit bracket.

I. All closers to be rectangular, full cover type of non-ferrous, non-corrosive material painted to match lockset finish.

J. Refer to 3.02.A.8 Installation for opening force requirements.

2.10 PUSH PLATES, DOOR PULLS AND KICKPLATES

A. All push plates, door pulls, kickplates and other miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware sets. Heavy-duty exterior anti-vandal pulls to be 1096/97HASP type as listed.

B. Supply 18 [.050] ga. thick bronze, brass, or stainless steel, beveled 4 sides. Doors with louvers or narrow bottom rails, kickplate height to be 1 inch less than the dimension shown from the door bottom to the bottom of the louver or glass.

1. Kickplates to be 10 inches high and Mop plates to be 6 inches high, both by 2 inches or 1 inch less than the door width as specified.

2. Required armor plates, edge guards and protective hardware to be supplied in sizes as scheduled in the hardware sets.

2.11 DOOR STOPS

A. All doors to have a floor stop or overhead integral closer arm stop.

B. Floor or overhead stops are required at all openings. Furnish 1209HAx630 at exterior outswinging doors, and 1214CK at interior, except where overhead CPS/CPSH stops are listed and/or otherwise required. Install floor stops within four (4) inches of adjacent wall [maximum].



2.12 AUTO FLUSH BOLTS, COORDINATORS AND SILENCERS

A. Furnish Flush bolts with Dust Proof Strikes and Coordinators as detailed and/or as required in the respective hardware sets. Finish to match adjacent hardware.

B. Silencers to be furnished as follows:

1. Three (3) at single openings and two (2) at pairs.

2.13 THRESHOLDS AND GASKETING

A. Supply materials and finishes as listed hardware sets. All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of the ADA and ANSI A117.1.

1. Furnish thresholds with flat head sleeve anchors. Furnish all necessary anchoring devices for gasketing and seal.

2. Thresholds may require modification depending on final drawings and frame/floor details. Field verify all openings. Where exterior flat thresholds are used, furnish ½ inch with sweep sufficient to prevent rodent entry similar to Pemko 172A x 18062CP Sweep.

2.14 FINISH

A. Special care shall be taken to coordinate the finish of the various manufacturers to insure a uniform finish. This finish shall match the finish of the locksets.

1. Plated hardware shall be BHMA626 [US26D] or as detailed in US32D.

B. Painted hardware items shall be lacquered to closely match plated hardware.

2.15 KEYING

A. Contractor and hardware supplier shall arrange a keying conference with the District Lock Department. The keying conference shall be completed in sufficient time so as not to prevent the finish hardware from being supplied to the contractor in an orderly manner. Keying system shall be approved in writing.

B. All cylinders to be “Peaks” 7-pin factory restricted masterkeyed removable core system as manufactured by the Best Lock Company. Peaks B2 keyway system to be integrated with the District’s existing A2 masterkey system. System requirements to be verified in writing by the District Lockshop Supervisor, Mr. Rey Villasenor.

1. Contractor is responsible for the temporary construction core system.

2. Contractor to coordinate with District Lockshop for the removal of construction cores, and insertion of the permanent core system. Installation labor by CUSD.

C. All key to be factory original nickel silver only.

D. Best cylinders: Mortise #1E74-C4RP3 and Rim #1E72-S2RP. Verify with the district lockshop.

E. Furnish each site: two (2) change keys for each lock; six (6) masterkeys each master level; five (5) grand masterkeys for each grand master system; and twelve (12) construction keys.

F. Permanently inscribe each key with number that identifies cylinder manufacturer, key symbol, stamping code, e.g., AA, AA1 etc; and stamped “Do Not Duplicate.”

G. For protection of the facility, key all cylinders at the factory where permanent records are maintained.



H. All permanent cores and keys to be shipped directly from Best Lock to the district’s lock department, “Return Receipt Requested.” Under no circumstances will the contractor or supplier be in possession of permanent cores or keys.

I. Each site: provide factory-bitting list with sufficient expansion to double the size of the original project. List(s) to be delivered to the District Lockshop Supervisor.

J. Key Control System: provide complete key control system to include visible card index, permanent key fiber tags, temporary key tags, receipt forms, and key gather envelops. Provide complete file and cross index file and install keys in proper hook location in cabinet. Provide wall mounted steel cabinet with capacity of 125 percent of the number of locks required for the project. Key control system shall be manufactured by TELKEE or equal approved. Deliver to the lock department. All indexing and hanging of keys will be by the lock department.

2.16 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Para 1.02. Unless otherwise approved, furnish only the specified products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. After installation has been completed, hardware supplier shall have a qualified Hardware Consultant [AHC] inspect project to determine the proper application of hardware according to the approved hardware and keying schedules.

1. Check operation and adjustment of all hardware items.

2. Recommended hardware adjustments shall be made by the Contractor/Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of finish hardware is specified under other sections. However, the following requirements apply to the work as follows:

1. Hardware shall be installed by a QUALIFIED MECHANIC skilled in the application of institutional grade builders hardware.

2. Install all hardware in full compliance with MFR'S instructions. When cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are to be painted or finished, install each item completely and then remove during application. After completion, re-install each item.

3. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. Damaged work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect.

4. Provide ADEQUATE BACKING in stud partitions for the attachment of all respective finish hardware.

5. If door swing is changed from original drawings during construction, the contractor shall make necessary changes at no cost to the owner.

6. Latches and bolts shall be installed to automatically engage strikes, whether activated by closers or manual push. In no instance should unusual manual pressure be required to engage latch or bolt in strikes. Install locks with keyways in proper position, with levers, roses, and/or escutcheons firmly affixed. Adjust strikes after silencers and/or seal are in place.

7. Predrill pilot holes in wood for screws. Drill and tap for surface mounted hardware on metal. Set hinge leaf snug and flat in mortises, turn screws to flat seat [do not drive].



8. Closers are to have opening force adjusted so as to comply with current applicable handicapped accessibility requirements as follows: interior doors 5 pounds maximum pressure to operate; exterior doors 5 pounds maximum pressure; fire doors 15 pounds maximum pressure, per CBC Section 1133B.2.5. The authority having jurisdiction may increase the maximum effort to operate fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15 lbs., maximum.

9. Mount closers and overhead stops/holders in accordance with the manufacturer's template for the degree of swing indicated on the drawings [180 degree swing where conditions allow].

10. Floor stops must be installed within four [4] inches of the adjacent wall.

11. All hardware shall meet the requirements of CBC Sections 1133B.2.1, 1133B.2.5.1 and 1003.3.1.8.

12. Door Sweeps and Seals to be installed with attachment screws placed within a minimum of one [1] inch from the end of the seal and sweep.

13. All panic hardware shall comply with UBC standards 10-4 and shall be mounted between 36” and 44” above finish floor surface. The unlatching force shall not exceed 15# applied in the direction of travel. Panic devices shall comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9.

B. HARDWARE LOCATIONS: Review and verify mounting locations with the Architect before issuing templates and door/hardware purchase orders. Mounting height of latching hardware shall be 36” to 44” FF per CBC Section 1133B.2.5.1. The following hardware locations shall be adhered to unless modified by the Architect. Minor adjustments are permitted to meet specific door mfr’s standards.

1. 40 inches Locksets, Panic Devices and Roller Latches-centerline of strike from bottom of frame.

2. 42 inches Pull Plates-centerline of grip from bottom of frame.

3. 42 inches Combination Push Bars-centerline from bottom of frame.

4. 44 inches Push Plates-centerline from bottom of frame.

5. Hinges Per manufacturer’s standard.

C. THRESHOLD AND PERIMETER SEAL:

1. Cut and fit thresholds to profile of doorframes, with mitered corners and hairline joints.

2. On exterior doors, set thresholds in a bed of sealant.

3. Before installation, carefully read manufacturer's instructions to assure tight and contiguous seal at the perimeter and corners of doors and frames.

4. Specified thresholds are subject to modification. Review final elevations.

5. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. At final completion, all hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Contractor shall make a final adjustment to all door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective, repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

1. Following the activation of building heating and air conditioning system, Contractor shall readjust all exterior and interior door closers.



B. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Adjust hardware so that moving parts operate freely, without bind, or excessive play. Hardware shall be free of paint, corrosion, or damage of any kind.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor is responsible for the proper protection of all items of hardware until the owner accepts the project as complete.

3.05 OWNER'S STOCK

A. Refer to 1.06 for close-out requirements.

B. Contractor/Installer to deliver all unused new and replaced finish hardware to the District’s Lock Department.

3.06 MANUFACTURER'S ABBREVIATIONS OF LISTED HARDWARE:

[BES] BEST [MCK] MCKINNEY [PEM] PEMKO [SGT] SARGENT [TEL] TELKEE [TIC] TICE [TRM] TRIMCO

CONTRACTOR SURVEY REQUIREMENTS: • NOTE: ALL OPENINGS TO BE FIELD INSPECTED FOR CORRECT HINGE SIZE, WEIGHT, AND

ANY WIDE THROW REQUIREMENTS NEEDED TO ACHIEVE MAXIMUM DR SWING. • NOTE: FURNISH MCK-14HDWT [WIDE THROW] AT EXTERIOR OPENINGS TO ACHIEVE

MAXIMUM DOOR SWING AS DETERMINED BY THE FIELD SURVEY. FURNISH 14HD WHERE APPLICABLE.

• NOTE: REFER TO THRESHOLD ELEVATIONS. TYPE TO BE VERIFED BY FIELD SURVEY. EXTERIOR OPENINGS TO BE FIELD INSPECTED FOR RAMP THRESHOLD REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF EACH LISTED EXTR OPENING.

• RAMP SYSTEM TO BE PEMKO R10SSMRAK, OR AS DICTATED TO ACCOMMODATE RESPECTIVE SILL CONDITIONS.

• OPTIONAL SCORE AND POUR IN LIEU OF RAMP SYSTEM TO BE REVIEWED W/ARCH. • NOTE: EXTERIOR NON-RAMP THRESHOLDS TO BE PEMKO 172A, OR AS DICTATED PER

FINAL ELEVATION DETAILS AND OPENING CONDITIONS. • NOTE: FURNISH CLOSER BRACKETS AS DICTATED BY DOOR/FRAME & OPG. COND. • NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE FLOOR CLOSERS AND INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS WHERE

OCCURRING. FILL CLOSER CAVITY. FURNISH MCK-14HD TO HANG EXISTING OR REPLACED DOOR WHERE OCCURRING.

• NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO CUT AND WELD REINFORCED STRIKES AT EXISTING HOLLOW METAL FRAMES AS REQUIRED FOR SPECIFIED MORTISE LOCKSETS.

• NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO FILL, PATCH, SAND AND REPAINT EXISTING [REUSED] DOORS AND FRAMES AFFECTED BY THE REMOVAL OF HARDWARE AND THE MACHINING FOR REPLACEMENT HARDWARE TO INCLUDE: LOCKSETS, PANIC, STRIKES, CLOSERS, HINGES, OH STOPS, PUSH-PULL PLATES, FLOOR STOPS, ETC.

• NOTE: WHERE OCCURRING, INTERIOR EXISTING HM DOORS [REUSED] TEMPLATED • FOR CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS TO BE FURNISHED SARGENT 72-11LJ SERIES. • NOTE: ALL INTERIOR EXISTING WD DOORS WITH CYLINDRICAL KNOB LOCKS LISTED FOR ADA

UPGRADE TO INCLUDE MAG CONVERSION PLATES IF REQUIRED. • FURNISH MAG “REINFORCEMENT” INSTALL-A-LOK WHERE REQUIRED.



• NOTE: LOUVERED DOORS MAY RESTRICT HEIGHT OF LISTED KICKPLATES. REVIEW FINAL DOOR ELEVATIONS.

• NOTE: DISTRICT STANDARD REQUIRE CLOSER ARMS TO ACHIEVE MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF STOR/MECH/STAFF TLT, OVERHEAD CLOSER STOP [CPS/CPSH] TO BE RESTRICTED TO CONDITIONS DICTATING OH CONTROL.

• NOTE: INSTALL PANIC@CENTERLINE OF HORIZ DOOR RAIL WHERE OCCURRING.

• NOTE: EXTERIOR HDWE TO BE FURNISHED “SHS” [SECURITY HEAD SCREWS]. • NOTE: SOME HARDWARE SETS MAY NOT BE USED IN RESPECTIVE PROJECTS. CONTRACTOR MUST CONDUCT SITE/BUILDING/OPENING SURVEY(S) BEFORE SHOP DRAWINGS ARE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL. INITIAL SUBMITTALS MUST BE COMPLETE & CORRECT, OR BE SUBJECT TO REJECTION BY THE PROJECT ARCH. Items listed in the following Finish Hardware Schedule shall conform to the specification. The last column in the hardware schedule refers to the manufacturer's abbreviation listed above.

3.07 HARDWARE SETS

HW1 [EXTERIOR/STORAGE LOCKSET x MANUAL FLUSHBOLT@MECH-STOR] EACH SGL TO HAVE: 3 EA. HINGE TA714 4.5x4.5 652 MCK 1 EA. LOCKSET 72-8237LNJ 626 SGT 1 EA. PERM CORE CORExB2 626 BES 1 EA. CLOSER 351-UHxTB [CPSH@404,405] 689 SGT 1 EA. STOP 1270SV 630 TRM 3 EA. SILENCER 1229A/B AS REQ GR TRM • CONTRACTOR TO SURVEY OPENING SILL. FURNISH APPLICABLE SIZE HARDWARE AS

LISTED, OR THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED DEPENDING ON SITE/OPG CONDITIONS.

END OF SECTION


METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS 09100-1

SECTION 09100

METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Supply and install Metal Support Systems as indicated and described herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09200: Lath and Plaster.

B. Section 09210: Gypsum Plaster.

C. Section 09215: Veneer Plaster.

D. Section 09260: Gypsum Board System.

E. Section 09510: Acoustical Ceilings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements.


A. In addition to compliance with applicable legal requirements comply with following standards:

1. ANSI A42.3 Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based Plaster, Exterior and Interior.

2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual -

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, current edition.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): Structural Welding Code (D1.1); Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures (D1.3).

4. ASTM Standards:

a. A446 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-

Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

b. A570 Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.

c. A611 Standard Specification for Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet Carbon, Structural.

d. C841 Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring.



e. C955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.

f. C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum

Board.

g. C1063 Installation of Lathing and Furring For Portland Cement Based Plaster. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect metal framing, furring and lathing materials before, during and after installation. In event of damage immediately make necessary repairs and replacements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Products described in this Section are as manufactured by Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company. Equivalent products of Keene Corporation, Western Metal Lath Company and United States Gypsum are acceptable.

2.02 INTERIOR PARTITIONS

A. Metal Studs: Studs for interior partitions shall be roll-formed channel or "cee" type equivalent to Milcor drywall studs, not lighter than #18 gage.

B. Track: Stud track for floor and ceiling anchorage shall be channel configuration, sized to fit

studs. Galvanized steel as manufactured for use with specified metal studs.

C. Design: Design shall be based on minimum 5 psf load applied perpendicular to the walls. Deflection shall not exceed 1/240 under the design load.

2.03 EXTERIOR WALLS

A. Non-load Bearing Metal Studs: A standard brand of prefabricated studs, pressed metal or welded. Pressed metal fabricated from commercial quality, hot or cold rolled carbon steel, in channel or "cee" shapes with either solid or perforated webs, not lighter than #18 gage.

2.04 METAL LATH

A. Metal Lath: Lath for Exterior and Interior Plastering shall be galvanized expanded metal confirming with ASTM C847, or galvanized wire fabric with backing conforming with ANSI 42.3 or galvanized welded wire mesh conforming with ASTM C933.

B. Wire for securing lath to metal framing, tying lath together and securing corner beads, metal

grounds and base screeds to lath and framing shall be #18 gage, galvanized conforming with ASTM A641.



2.05 FURRING CHANNELS AT MASONRY WALLS

A. Furring channels, hat-shaped, #20 gage for furring of masonry walls shall be 7/8" deep screwable furring channels.

2.06 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

A. Runner Channels: Steel runner channels shall be #16 gage, 1-1/2" deep, coated rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Furring Channels: Hat shaped #25 gage channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings

shall be 7/8" deep screwable, galvanized furring channels as manufactured by Inland-Ryerson. 3/4 cold-rolled channels for tied or clipped-on lath shall be #16 gage, coated with rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Hanger Wire: #8 gage galvanized and annealed carbon steel wire.

2.07 LATHING ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories shall conform with ASTM C1047.

B. Corner Beads: No. 1 with expanded flages, for gypsum plaster.

C. Corner Reinforcement: For portland cement plaster, Stockton "Corner-aid" or Western Metal Lath's "Stucco-Lok".

D. Internal Corner Reinforcement: Cornerite 2" wings.

E. Reinforcing Strips: Striplath or Stripite.

F. Metal Weep Screeds: Shape as indicated on Drawings or a standard type suitable for

juncture of plaster and cement base:

1. Weep Screed for Flush Cement Base and Similar Installation: Fabricated from minimum #26 gage copper-bearing steel sheet, standard flange, galvanized.

2. Curved Point Weep Screed: Fabricated from minimum #26 gage copper-bearing steel

sheet, 1/2" curved point, galvanized.

G. Casing Bead for Trim or Ground: Fabricated from minimum #24 gage copper bearing sheet steel, short flange, 1/2" or 7/8" ground as required, galvanized.

H. Metal Trim Screed: Superior No. 21 Metal Casing, National Cornice Works, Los Angeles,

California.

I. Relief Joints (Control Joints): U.S. Gypsum Control Joint XJ15-3 by Keene Corp.

J. Ventilation Expansion Screed: Superior Metal Trim Products, manufactured by H.K. Porter Co., Los Angeles, California, #222 modified as indicated on Drawings. Provide in 10'-0" and 8" lengths, using short pieces as backer behind butt joints of full length pieces. Fasteners for holding butted pieces to backer, round head, stainless steel sheet metal screws; not less than 4 screws at each side of butted joints.



K. Pencil Rods: Crimped 1/4" round, mild steel; minimum 1-1/4" crimp 16" on centers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other trades to provide blocking for items mounted on finished surfaces and to make allowances for pipes and other items inside partitions and walls.

B. Verify that all overhead or concealed work is completed, tested, inspected, accepted, and

finished as required before starting work of this Section.

C. Promptly notify the District Inspector in writing of any job conditions, discrepancies in location, or apparent defects in work of other trades that will affect proper installation or function of work of this Section. Do not proceed with work until such defects have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Walls and Partitions:

1. Attach floor runners for exterior walls and interior partitions to concrete slab with approved power driven fasteners. Spacing of fasteners not to exceed 24" o.c. Attach ceiling runners to structure.

2. Space studs at no greater than 16" o.c. unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Studs

shall be located approximately 2" from all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, and partition corners; except those providing support for door and window openings.

3. Furnish and install manufacturer's standard floor track and shoes. Securely wire studs

to shoes or studs may be tack welded to floor track in lieu of providing wired shoes. Secure track to floor by means of 1/4" x 1-1/4" Star "Dryvin" hammer drive anchors or 3/16" x 1" round head, "Rawl-Drives" one-piece expansion bolts spaced not to exceed 3'-0", and set in drilled holes in slab, or to wood joist with nails as indicated. Track may be secured to concrete floor slabs with 1/4" x 7/8" low velocity, power driven fasteners, equal to "Pneutek".

4. Studs shall be seated squarely in track with stud web and flanges abutting track web,

plumbed and securely attached with sheet metal screws, to flanges or web of both floor and top tracks. Provide 4 screws per stud.

5. Where there is no suspended ceiling, tops of studded walls shall have track and shoes

and be secured in place as specified for floors. Welding of studs to ceiling track will not be permitted except where bearing studs are used.

6. Over metal door frames install a cut-to-length section of runner track with flanges slit and

web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs and securely attach to studs. At door jambs extend studs continuous to structure above.

7. Bridging, or horizontal bracing of 1-1/2", cold-rolled channels shall be attached in a

manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging shall be supplied as follows: Walls up to 10'-0" high, one row at mid-height; Walls exceeding 10'-0" high, bridging or bracing rows spaced not to exceed 5'-0" on center.



8. Wind bracing shall be attached where indicated on Drawings. Minimum size of strap shall be as indicated on Drawings. Track where strap terminates shall be anchored as indicated on Drawings.

B. Ceiling Suspension System:

1. Construct horizontal furring for plastered surfaces using specified 1-1/2" runner channels

spaced not to exceed 4'-0" on center, and 3/4" furring channels spaced not to exceed 16" on center.

2. Hanger Wires:

a. Hanger wires for ceilings suspended from wood frame construction shall be attached with stem lag screws in bottom edge of joists or rafters. Wire shall be looped through hole in stem lag screw and then wrapped thrice around itself. Stem lag screws shall be equal to "Stanlag Screws" by Stanline, Inc. type and penetration as follows:

Type Hanger Wire Screw Size Penetration, Minimum. Stanlag #SLS-3 #12 & #10 1-1/4" Stanlag #SLS-375 #9 & #8 1-1/2"

b. Hanger wire shall be wrapped twice around runner channel, drawn up taut, and wrapped thrice around itself in 1-1/2 inches.

3. Runner channels shall be installed 6" maximum from walls, parallel to runners. Splices

in runner channels shall be made at hangers only, by lapping channels not less than 12" and tying channels together at 2 points with a double wrap of tie wire twisted up taut.

4. Ends of runner channels abutting concrete or masonry surfaces shall be 1-1/4" clear and

shall be tied to wall or partition with 3/4" channel brackets having 4" right angle bend secured with two 1/4" x 1" powder driven fasteners. Brackets shall extend from face of surface not less than 8", and shall be tied to runner channels at 2 points with double wrap of tie wrap of tie wire twisted up taut.

5. Securely saddle-tie furring channels to runner channels at each crossing with #16 gage

tie wire twisted up taut, and with wings left uncut and bent back. 3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Install ceiling furring at the elevation indicated within 1/4", flat within 1/4" in 10'-0". 3.04 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion, repair damage caused by work and remove debris, surplus materials and tools of work from site. Leave installation broom clean and ready for plastering.

END OF SECTION


METAL LATHING 09206 - 1

SECTION 09206

METAL LATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Metal lathing for wet plaster finish.

B. Lathing accessories

C. Bituthane Membrane

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09220 – Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 REFERENCES

1. ANSI/ASTM C1063 – Installation of Lathing and Furring for Exterior.

2. ANSI/ASTM C847 – Metal Lath.

3. Western Lath/Plaster/Drywall Industries Association Specifications for Metal Lathing, Furring, Plastering and Drywall.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with ten years documented experience.

B. Perform work in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C1063. ML/SFA – Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring.

C. Perform work in accordance with UBC Chapter 47.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data on lathing components, and accessories for each product provided by this section.

B. Submit three metal lath samples 4 x 6 inch in size illustrating component design, material, and finish.

C. Submit three samples 6 inches long of each trim accessory.

D. Submit three samples 5” x 7” of building paper.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, and electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind framing and lathing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND STUCCO ACCESSORIES

A. Keene Corporation

B. Superior

C. W.R. Grace

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Lath: 17 ga. wire self-furred with double “D” building paper.

B. Rib Lath; 3.5 lb. Galvanized metal, ¼ inch riblath, self furring. 27-1/2” x 96” sheets for soffit application.

C. Corner Bead, Casing Bead, soffit vent and Foundation Weep Screed: As indicated on plans. Galvinized metal.

D. Building Paper: Individual rolls of asphalt saturated felt, 15lb, type I grade D.

E. Flashing paper: Moiststop, 9inch width, laminated reinforced kraft paper by Fortfiber. No substitutes.

F. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel; minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inch size.

G. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, minimum 26 gage thick; 2 inch wide x 24 inch long.

H. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal.

I. Bituthane Membrane: Self-adhered, 60 mil. Thick bituthene rubberized asphalt 36 inch wide roll manufactured by W.R. Grace. No Substitutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Plaster and Drywall systems manual.

3.03 BUILDING PAPER

A. Install 1 layer of building paper over all exterior walls that are plywood sheathed and weather lap edges by 6 inches. This requirement is in addition to the paper backed metal lath.

B. Install moiststop flashing at parapet wall caps and around all door and window openings. Weather lap edges to shed water at opening corners. Turn down both sides of parapet wall.

C. Membrane Application: Install Bituthane at locations indicated on plan. Establish a starting point. Pull release paper 2 to 3 feet and roll back under membrane. Place membrane, adhesive side down. Apply in a straight line avoiding wrinkles and over-correcting which causes “fish mouths.” The membrane should be rolled with a hand roller to achieve total contact to the surface and eliminate air bubbles. Side laps should be 2 ½ inches minimum.



3.04 LATHING MATERIALS

A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.

B. Where laps occur peel back and separate paper from metal lath so that all lapped edges are “paper to paper and metal to metal.” Lap ends minimum one inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. Lap shall be paper to paper metal to metal.

C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum ½ inch and ends a minimum of 1 inch. Nest outside ribs of rib lath together.

D. Attach metal lath to supports using tie wire.

E. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3 inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.

F. Place corner reinforcement at all corners; fasten at outer edges only.

G. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lather openings. Secure rigidly in place.

H. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place.

I. Place casing beads at all terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in place.

J. Establish contraction, control, and expansion joints with specified joint device.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION


PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1

SECTION 09220

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Portland cement plaster system.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09206 – Metal Lathing: Metal lathing for plaster base and accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement.

B. ASTM C206 – Finishing Hydrated Lime.

C. ASTM C631 – Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering.

D. ASTM C897 – Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters.

E. ASTM C926 – Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.

F. Western Lath/Plaster/Drywall Industries Association.

G. Plaster and Drywall Systems Manual.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in cement plaster work with a minimum of ten years documented experience of applying Portland Cement stucco.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data on plaster materials, including finish stucco and fibers, characteristics and limitations of product specified.

B. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for finish coat and bonding agent.

C. Construct field sample panel, 10 ft long by 10 ft wide, illustrating surface finish, color of finish coat and expansion joints. This is required for type A & B finish.

D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply plaster when substrate of ambient air temperature is less than 40 degrees F nor more than 90 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F during and after installation of plaster.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLASTER BASE COAT MATERIALS

A. Cement : ASTM C150, Low Alkali – Type II Portland. Gray color.

B. Plastersizer: Kel-Crete liquid admixture by Concrete Additives California (800) 845-1833.

C. Aggregate: Natural sand. In accordance with ANSI/ASTM C897.

D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.

E. Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Alkali resistance fibers, ½ inch nominal length. Manufactured by Harbourite or equal.

2.02 PLASTER FINISH COAT MATERIALS

A. Finish: Premixed Cementious Finish Coat, Waterproof, millmixed, CMF finish, 30/60 grit sieve size, formulated cement base stucco by La Habra, Cota or equal. Fields mixed finish coat is not acceptable.

B. Texture:

1. Medium Sand Float Finish at all exterior surfaces.

2.03 BONDING AGENT (AT BLOCK OR CONCRETE WALLS)

A. Bonding Agent: Thoro bond by Thoro Systems, Weldcrete manufactured by Larsons or equal. Non-oxidizing, non-crystallizing, type recommended for satisfactory bonding cement plaster to concrete and concrete block surfaces, conforming to ASTM C631.

2.04 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES

A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C926.

B. Except where specified otherwise, material are specified on a volume basis and shall be measured in approved containers, mixing boxes, which will insure that the specified proportions will be controlled and accurately maintained during the progress of the work. Shovel mixing is not allowed. Ready-mix stucco shall be prepared for use by the addition of water and acrylic add mixture only.

C. Scratch coat: One par portland cement, 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, 4 to 5 gallons water, and 2 oz. Kel-Crete per sack of cement.

D. Mix brown coat one par portland cement, 3-1/2 to 4 parts sand, 4 to 5 gallons water, and 2 oz. Kel-Crete per sack of cement.

E. Add fibers at the rate of .75 lb. Per sack of cement, to prevent balling of fibers thoroughly hand separate glass fibers in small quantities and add to mixture. Ensure a uniform and thorough disbursement of glass fibers in basecoat, brown coat and scratch coat.

F. Finish Coat: In strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

G. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.

H. Mix material dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

I. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation.

J. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to beginning work, notify Architect and in his presence conduct a metal lath inspection and verify that metal lath has been installed according to Section 09206.

B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

C. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other Sections of work have been installed.

D. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved.

E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surfaces near the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

B. Tape off and mask all windows, doors and other finishes from damage.

3.03 BONDING

A. Apply bonding agent to masonry or concrete surfaces scheduled to receive stucco, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.04 PLASTERING

A. Sequencing and Scheduling: Sequence and schedule plastering Work for continuous application, free from cold joints, scaffold lines, color and texture variations, and other deficiencies detrimental to finish appearance and performance. Continuously apply each plaster coast in one general direction without allowing plaster to dry at edges. If full width of wall cannot be covered at one time, terminate application at natural division to dry at edges. If full width of wall cannot be covered at one time, terminate application at natural division of surface such as control joint or corner.

B. Apply plaster in accordance with these specifications, ASTM C926 and the Plaster and Drywall Systems Manuals.

C. On metal lath apply scratch coat to nominal thickness of 3/8 inch and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch. Apply brown coat in an undulating irregular fashion to achieve a varying surface plane. Minimum thickness of the brown coat must always exceed 3/8 inches. The applied finish coat shall follow and preserve the irregular surface of the brown coat.

D. On concrete masonry and concrete apply base coat to a nominal thickness of ½ inch and a finish coat to 1/8 inch thick at concrete block walls.

E. Moist

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION


GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM 09260-1

SECTION 09260

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM


A. Supply and install Gypsum Board System as indicated.

B. Repair recommendations for damaged drywall. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 09100: Metal Support Systems.

C. Section 09510: Acoustical Ceilings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating complete suspension system including all connections, anchorage and trim features.

2. Submit 18" x 18" samples of the texture coat of gypsum board panels with all edges

taped. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In addition to compliance with applicable legal requirements comply with following:

1. Underwriters Laboratories for fire-rated materials and products classification.

2. NFPA for fire-rated assemblies.

3. ASTM C36, C840, C841, C1002 and C1047. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original, factory sealed packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and name of manufacturer.

B. Materials shall be kept dry. Gypsum wall board shall be neatly stacked flat; avoid sagging

and damage to edges, ends and surfaces.

C. Fire-rated materials shall have fire classifications numbers attached and legible.

D. Use all means necessary to protect gypsum board systems before, during and after installation. In event of damage immediately make all necessary repairs or replacements as required at no additional cost to the District.




A. Gypsum Board:

1. Type X (fire retardant) 5/8" thick, 48" wide, up to 16'- 0" long conforming to ASTM C369 with long edges tapered.

2. Water resistant, WR, 5/8" thick, 48" wide, up to 16'-0" long conforming to ASTM C645

with long edges tapered.

B. Metal Framing:

1. Steel Studs: See Section 09100: Metal Support Systems.

2. Floor and Ceiling Runners: Same material and gage as studs, in widths to accommodate each stud size used.

3. Steel Channels: 3/4" and 1-1/2" cold rolled steel, weighing 300 and 475 pounds

minimum per 1,000 lineal feet with rust-inhibitive primer.

4. Furring Channels: 7/8" deep by 2-5/8" wide, hat- shaped, screw type, minimum #25 gage, galvanized steel channels.

C. Fastenings:

1. Screws: ASTM C1002 self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head drywall screws; No. 6 Type

S, 1" long for metal framing, Type W 1-1/4" long for wood framing (for single-layer panels). Screws shall be given a corrosion-resistant treatment.

2. Nails: 5d, 1-5/8" long, flat-headed, cement coated, and conforming to ASTM C514.

D. Wire: Galvanized and annealed carbon steel wire:

1. Tie Wire: No. 16 SWG

2. Hanger Wire: No. 8 SWG, annealed and galvanized.

E. Metal Trim: ASTM C1047, fabricated from minimum #26 gage galvanized, treated for

adhesion of joint compound and paint, and with slotted, drilled or punched perforations in flanges. Trim units shall be of size and type to fit gypsum board construction and shall include corner beads, casings, edge trim and all other shapes indicated and required.

F. Finishing Materials:

1. Reinforcing tape and joint compound as manufactured or recommended by wallboard

manufacturer.

2. Texture coat finish material shall be manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum, Hamilton, or Highland Stucco and Lime Products, Inc.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing

1. Partitions: a. Securely anchor floor runners to concrete slab with powder-driven fasteners of type

indicated and to wood floors with wood screws; size and spacing as indicated. Attachment at tops of stud walls shall be provided as indicated. Provide a top runner at top of all stud partitions.

b. Position studs vertically between top and bottom runners spaced 16" on centers,

maximum. Studs shall be attached at top and bottom to runners by welding or approved fasteners. Provide 3/4" stiffener channels inside web of studs running horizontally and spaced not to exceed 5'-0" on centers. Wire stiffeners to each stud with 3 full twists of #16 gage wire.

c. Provide stud or runner pieces between studs, running horizontally and vertically at

locations indicated, for use as blocking for attachment of cabinets or other items.

d. Openings in partitions shall have double back to back or nested studs from floor to ceiling. Install 1-1/2" channel horizontal reinforcement in web openings of studs 6" maximum above door openings. Extend horizontal reinforcement continuously past studs alongside frame and past next studs on each side of opening. Saddle-tie channel to each vertical stud it crosses. Screw attach, weld or wire-tie studs to jamb anchors of metal frames.

2. Suspended Ceilings:

a. Suspend 1-1/2" runner channels 4'-0" on centers at right angles to steel joists.

Suspend from supporting members with hanger wires spaced 4'-0" on centers along channels. Runner channels shall clear perimeter walls by not less than 1". Attach hanger wires to framing in accord with ASTM C841.

b. Hanger wires for ceilings suspended from wood frame construction shall be attached

with stem lag screws in bottom edge of joists or rafters. Wire shall be looped through hole in stem lag screw and then wrapped twice around itself. Stem lag screws shall be equal to "Stanlag Screws" by Stanline, Inc. type and penetration as follows:

Type Hanger Screw Wire Size Penetration,

Minimum Stanlag #SLS-3 #12 & #10 1-1/4" Stanlag #SLS-375 #9 & #8 1-1/4"

c. Hanger wire shall be wrapped twice around runner channel, drawn up taut, and

wrapped twice around itself.

d. Runner channels shall be installed 6" maximum from walls, parallel to runners. Splices in runner channels shall be made at hangers only, by lapping channels not



less than 12" and tying channels together at 2 points with a double wrap of tie wire twisted up taut.

e. Install hat shaped furring channels at right angles to runner channels, spaced 24" on

centers, and wire tied at each intersection with double strand of specified tie wire. B. Metal Trim:

1. Provide corner beads at all outside corners and angles, metal casing where gypsum

board terminates at uncased openings, metal edge trim where board edges abut horizontal and vertical surfaces of other construction.

2. Install trim in accordance with manufacturer's directions and secure to framing with

proper fasteners through flange perforations. Apply trim in longest practical pieces.

C. Gypsum Board:

1. Install gypsum board in conformance with ASTM C840. 2. Gypsum board shall be cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from face

side. Where board meets projecting surfaces it shall be scribed and neatly cut. Unless conditions require otherwise, board shall be applied first to ceilings, then to walls. All end joints shall occur over a support. Use panels of maximum practical length so that a minimum number of end joints occur.

3. End joints shall be staggered and joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be

arranged to occur on different studs. Joint layout at openings shall be made so that no end joints will align with edges of openings.

4. Except where specified otherwise, fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8" from

edges and ends of gypsum board. Do not stagger fasteners at adjoining edges and ends.

5. Install gypsum board vertically at all walls. Attach board with drywall screws or nails

spaced not to exceed 8" on centers around perimeter of boards and 12" on centers on intermediate studs. Space screws or nails at 8" on centers along top and bottom runners. Screws shall be driven to provide screwhead penetration just below gypsum board surface without breaking surface paper. Where electrical outlet and switch boxes are indicated, provide adjustable attachment brackets between studs.

6. Install gypsum board to ceiling framing with long dimension at right angles to furring

channels, or wood framing members, and attach with specified drywall screws or nails spaced 6" to 7" on centers across board. Screws or nails shall be not less than 1/2" from side joints and 3/8" from butt end joints. Abutting end joints shall occur over furring channels and end joints of boards shall be staggered. Support cutouts or openings in ceilings with furring channels.

7. Install access doors, furnished under another section, in correct location, plumb or level,

flush with adjacent construction, and securely attached to framing. 3.02 TOLERANCE

A. Install gypsum board flat within 1/8" in 10'-0".



3.03 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Exposed Surfaces: All internal and external corners and angles and joints between panels shall be reinforced with perforated tape and joint compound and finished as follows:

1. Taping: Fill all corners and recesses between gypsum board panels with sufficient

thickness of joint compound to completely hide board at all joints. Center tape on joint and press tightly to 2 panels using suitable tool. Lay excess compound squeezed from beneath tape smoothly on top of tape.

2. Second Coat: When first coat is dry, spread a second coat application of joint

compound evenly over entire joint to beyond shoulder of recess or tape. 3. Third Coat: When second coat is dry, apply sufficient joint compound to even up all

surfaces of joint. 4. Screw Depressions: Apply at least 2 coats of joint compound to fill depressions even

and flush with surface of panel. 5. At trim flanges apply joint compound in 3 coats, full thickness at bead nose and feather

out at least 10". 6. Sanding: Between applications of compound, rough spots or areas shall be sanded

smooth where necessary. When dry, finish coat shall be sanded as required to leave joints and screw spots flat, flush and smooth, and ready for painting or finishing.

B. Surfaces To Be Covered With Acoustic Tile: Screw heads shall be recessed and all joints

reinforced with tape and joint compound.

1. Screw Depressions: Fill with compound and finish flush with surface of panel. 2. Taping: Fill all corners and recesses between gypsum board panels with sufficient

thickness of joint compound to completely hide all joints. Center tape on joint and press tightly to the 2 panels using suitable tool. Lay excess compound squeezed from beneath tape smoothly on top of tape.

3. Finishing: Where panels are to be covered with acoustical tile, taping compound need

not be sanded. 3.04 TEXTURE COAT

A. Spray apply texture coat to all interior gypsum board surfaces which are scheduled to receive a painted finish, except in food preparation areas.

B. Texture coat shall create a uniform splatter pattern finish with an 80% minimum coverage of

surface. C. Interior surfaces of electrical boxes and wiring therein shall be protected from spray.

3.05 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion, repair damage caused by work and remove debris, surplus materials and tools of work from site. Leave installation clean and ready for finishing.



3.06 REPAIR RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DAMAGED DRYWALL

A. Reset all nails which are protruding or loose. B. For each nail in a fractured area or a protruding nail, add a nail similar to existing, in an

undamaged area of drywall near the loose nail into the framing. C. Remove loose gypsum, paper, and joint compound. D. Refinish to match existing texture. E. Paint entire wall plane, color to match existing.

END OF SECTION


RUBBER BASE 09658 - 1

SECTION 09658

RUBBER BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.


1. Topset coved rubber base for installation with hard surface flooring.

2. Straight rubber base for installation with carpet and soft surface flooring.


1. Section 09665: Sheet Vinyl Flooring.

2. Section 09680: Carpet

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published technical data describing materials, construction and recommended installation directions. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material.

B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance, care and cleaning of base.

C. Samples: Submit Samples of cove and straight top set base in each available color. Following color selections, submit Samples, not less than 12 inches long of each selected color and type. Submit pint cans of each type adhesive.

D. Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver at least 50 lineal feet with 5 end stop units and 5 outside corner units of each color of rubber base installed. Deliver the materials in unopened factory containers or in sealed cartons with labels identifying the contents, matching installed materials. Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials.


A. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials.

B. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer’s packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name. Materials shall be stored at not less than 70 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before installation.




A. Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive rubber base are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for site installation conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Burke/Mercer Flooring Products, 2250 S. Tenth Street, San Jose, CA 95112.

B. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., 1320 Archwood Avenue, Akron OH.

C. Flexco Company, P.O. Box 553, Tuscumbia, AL 35674.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Rubber base: Conform to ASTM F 1861; Group 1, solid (homogeneous); Type TS, thermoset vulcanized rubber; Style A, straight; and Style B; 4 inch high unless otherwise indicated, integral colors as selected, non-shrinking, 1/8 inch thick, with matching molded inside corners and end stops.

B. Base Adhesive: Water based, low odor type formulated specially for use with rubber base, and manufactured or recommended by manufacturer of rubber base.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work of this section with other sections to provide a level, smooth and clean finish surfaces to receive rubber base.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Field verify dimensions and other conditions affecting the Work of this section before commencing the Work of this section.

B. Before Work is started, examine surfaces that are to receive rubber base. Deficiencies shall be corrected before starting the Work of this section.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Do not start preparation until adjacent concrete floor slabs are at least 90 days old and finish flooring is installed.

B. Install rubber base when ambient temperature is 70 degrees F or higher.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install cove base at all hard floors, including resilient flooring, concrete, and wood. Install straight base at carpet and other soft floors, unless otherwise required.

B. Securely fasten cement base to backing in long lengths in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Lay out lengths so that not less than 18 inches long filler pieces are provided. Assure that top and toe continuously contact the wall and floor, and that all joints are tight. Install factory formed internal and external corners, and end stops where cove base ends at jambs and offsets.

C. Base and outside corners shall be rolled with a seam roller before adhesive sets.



3.05 CLEANING

A. Maintain surfaces of base clean as installation progresses. Clean rubber base when sufficiently seated and remove foreign substances.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces of adhesive or other defacement. Replace damaged or defective Work to the specified condition.

3.06 CLEAN UP

A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.07 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION


SHEET VINYL FLOORING 09665 - 1

SECTION 09665

SHEET VINYL FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Supply and install sheet vinyl flooring with integral cove base as indicated.


A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturers specification data sheets and maintenance recommendations.

2. Samples of type, color and pattern; 3 - 12" x 12".

3. Base cap and reducer strip.


A. Protect sheet vinyl flooring before, during and after application. In event of damage, immediately make necessary repairs and replacements.

B. Deliver materials to jobsite in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Store materials in the building at least 24 hours prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Sheet Vinyl Flooring: “Medintech” by Armstrong Commercial Flooring. Design pattern or color to be selected by the Architect. This is a District Standard.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Vinyl Flooring: F S L-F-475A(3), Type II Class A, 79" wide roll. ASTM F1303-90, Type I, Grade I, Class B backing. Fire Test Data: ASTM E648, NFPA 253, ASTM E662, NFPA 258. Overall gage 0.080".

B. Wet Areas: Integral cove stick and cap metal installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, 3/4" radius cove.

C. Adhesives, primers and polish shall be products recommended by flooring manufacturer for conditions of use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Do not begin installation of sheet vinyl flooring until work of all trades, including painting, has been completed. No material shall be applied when temperature of room in which work is to be done is lower than 70° F. Heat shall be provided as required.


SHEET VINYL FLOORING 09665 - 2

B. Sand joints of plywood sub flooring smooth. Fill cracks 1/16" and wider, and minor concave areas, with plastic wood and sand smooth. Remove dirt, dust and foreign material from floor before applying the covering. Remove sanding dust by vacuuming.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Extend sheet vinyl flooring under floor mounted plumbing fixtures, casework, equipment and up wall to form a 6" integral cover base or as specified by District Representative.

B. Primer and Adhesives:

1. Prime plywood sub floor as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

2. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide safety precautions during mixing and application as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Apply uniformly over surfaces.

3. Cover only that amount of area, which can be covered by flooring material within recommended working time of adhesive.

4. Seam adhesive and seam sealer shall be best suited for the sheet vinyl to be installed. Seam adhesive and sealer shall be of the same brand as the flooring materials, and as recommended by the manufacture.

5. Flooring material, shall be rolled in both directions with 75-150 lb. linoleum roller while adhesive is still fresh and per manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Remove any adhesive which has dried or has filmed over.

7. Promptly remove any spillage.

3.03 CLEANING AND FINISHING

A. Upon completion of sheet vinyl flooring application, allow sufficient time for flooring to seat itself before attempting to clean and finish, follow flooring manufacturer's recommendations.

B. After flooring has thoroughly seated, clean with an approved neutral cleaner. If flooring is dirty, use a scrubbing machine, in obstinate areas, with a #0 steel wool pad to clean.

C. In cleaning floor, use minimum amount of water. Immediately picked up, water using either a dry mop or a vacuum. Finish flooring after it is clean and dry.

D. After installation is completed and flooring material has been cleaned and finished as specified, damaged or defective portions shall be taken up, replaced or repaired and refinished.

E. Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces soiled by work, repair or replace damage caused by work, and remove debris and surplus materials from project site.

F. Protect completed work from traffic and damage until final acceptance.

END OF SECTION


CARPET 09680 - 1

SECTION 09680

CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes carpet, installation, accessories, and cushion.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics.

1. Provide data on carpet adhesive's off-gassing characteristics, and provide certification from manufacturer that adhesive is "state-of-the-art" regarding reduced toxic off-gassing compounds. Submit comparative data and research reports.

C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions.

D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following:

1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required.

2. 12-inch-long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item.


A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70.

2. Rating: Pass.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.

B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside wellƒventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored.


CARPET 09680 - 2


A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate.

B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CARPET

A. Provide the following types:

1. Direct Glue Tufted Loop; Medium grade

a. Color / Texture: To be selected from manufacturer’s standards.

b. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop

c. Pile Content: Nylon, Solution Dyed

d. Pile Weight: Minimum 26 oz. per square yard.

e. Location: All office locations, public areas including corridors and lobbies.

B. Manufacturer’s

1. Atlas - Oxford 26

2. Mannington - System II

3. Lees

4. Mohawk

5. Shaw

6. Others as approved by Architect.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber; minimum 2-inch-wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

C. Carpet Adhesive: Non-toxic, water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet.

1. Provide least toxic, off-gassing adhesive available on the market today.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting.

1. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. Remove existing wax, chemical coatings, or other materials that will prevent bonding of adhesive.


CARPET 09680 - 3

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.

B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space.

C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.

D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate.

E. For carpet with cushion:

1. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet.

2. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet.

F. For glue-down carpet:

1. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement.

2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent.

B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with faceƒbeater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn.

C. Vacuum carpet.

D. Give usable scraps to Owner.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


PAINTING 09900-1

SECTION 09900

PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exterior: Exposed new and repaired items and surfaces. 2. Interior: Exposed new and existing items and surfaces within the scope of the Project,

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to

shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedule indicates that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers,

exposed steel and iron Work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, where they occur in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,

and labels.

1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following components:

Existing factory finished windows (if any) that are to remain). Architectural woodwork and casework. Toilet compartments. Metal lockers. Acoustical panels, and suspension systems. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. Light fixtures. Distribution cabinets. New vinyl wall covering.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible areas:

Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. Pipe spaces. Duct shafts.


PAINTING 09900-2

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other

code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removal of existing wall covering (if any) that is

not adhered or cannot be successfully re-adhered and painted. 2. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic-marking paint. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows" for factory finished windows. 6. Division 9 Section "Wall Covering" for re-adhering existing wall coverings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Include each material

and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label

analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations

controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate

actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrates.


PAINTING 09900-3

1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each

sample for location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture

only.

a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch 9100-mm) square samples for each color and finish. b. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch (300-mm) square samples of each color and

material on hardboard. c. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch (100 by 200 mm) samples of natural-

or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch (100-mm) square samples of flat metal and two 8-

inch (200-mm) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. e. Gypsum Board: Provide two 12-inch (300-mm) square samples of each color and

material.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Unused Paint Materials: Submit to District unused and partially used paints, adequately labeled

with Project name, manufacturer, and color formula. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of 3 years of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating

system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of

coating and substrate required on the Project. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.

1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq.ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required.

2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply

coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.


PAINTING 09900-4

a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples, which may remain as part of finish

system if in good condition as determined by Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste

daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and Work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

D. Contractor is responsible for providing protection and for taking precautions required by

applicable regulations concerning the presence of lead-containing materials. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Alteration and Hazardous Materials Procedures".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


PAINTING 09900-5

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Paint schedules are based on Dunn Edwards products. Comparable materials from I.C.I. (Dulux Paints) will be considered an acceptable substitute.

2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating

types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors

or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. Comply with Division 1 Section "Substitutions".

C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's color designations. D. Compliance With Regulatory Requirements: Provide paint products that are in compliance with

the local air quality control district's VOC requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. With the Applicator present, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and

surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Contractor is responsible for examining and testing existing coatings and paints to

determine existing materials, for providing effective barrier coats before applying new coatings, and removing unsound coatings on existing surfaces, if required.

3. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions

within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others.

C. Do not paint existing wall coverings until they have been repaired and patched. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR NEW SURFACES

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical


PAINTING 09900-6

or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using

workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process

will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, and cement plaster to be painted. Remove

efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.

If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written directions.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral

spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,

faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

4. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside.

5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or

sealer immediately on delivery. 6. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop

coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.


PAINTING 09900-7

a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

7. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum- based solvents so

surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

3.03 PREPARATION FOR EXISTING MATERIALS

A. Sterilize mildew before performing waterblasting or other cleaning operations. Use a solution in

the following proportions of TSP (2/3 cup), household bleach (1 qt.), powdered detergent (1/3 cup), and warm water to make 1 gallon. Use rubber gloves and goggles. Thoroughly rinse after sterilizing.

1. Add mildewcide to primer and paint to be applied over surfaces sterilized for mildew.

B. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to

cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Remove chalking, loose, and flaking coatings by water blasting, wet or dry sanding, wire

brushing, and other methods as necessary to provide a sound substrate.

1. Waterblasting of existing exterior surfaces is required. Use appropriate pressure to assure there is no damage to underlying surfaces or materials.

2. Use waterblasting with detergents or cleaners as necessary if recommended by paint

manufacturer. 3. Wait 48 hours after waterblasting before wire brushing and scraping to remove loose paint.

D. Perform crack repair to provide surfaces that will remain crack free. Use appropriate paintable

elastomeric sealants, applied to properly prepared crack joints. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Patch and repair existing surfaces with approved filler compound appropriate to each surface. Remove foreign materials not indicated to remain before patching. Fill all holes and cracks. Patches shall match existing surfaces with no evidence of patching or repair.

2. Prepare existing painted finishes to assure proper adhesion of new coats. Remove ridges

and different thicknesses of paint to provide uniform, tapered, smooth transition of substrate between bare and painted areas. Clean surfaces.

3. Provide barrier coats over existing coatings if necessary and over incompatible primers, or

remove and reprime. 4. Spot prime existing painted surfaces with an appropriate primer or sealer where full surface

priming is not necessary. 5. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of new patched plaster surfaces by performing

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.


PAINTING 09900-8

6. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral

spirits, and as required. 7. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces and remove rust.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and apply prime coat.

8. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove loose and flaking paint. 9. Existing Transparent Wood Finishes: Sand lightly and touch-up stain, if any. If necessary,

apply sealer to even out absorption of stain. Apply new varnish in number of coats indicated in the Schedule for new transparent finish.

10. Existing Vinyl Wall Covering (If Any): Verify that wall covering is secure and well adhered to

substrate.

a. If not well adhered, do not proceed with painting of wall covering until it is glued to substrate under Division 9 Section "Wall Covering".

b. Texturing of substrate where wall covering has been removed is specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies".

F. Fill, patch, sand, and repaint metal and wood doors and frames that remain or which are

modified. 3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

B. Tinting: At Architect's option, tinting may be required. If so, tint each undercoat a lighter shade

to simplify identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.05 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.


PAINTING 09900-9

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed

surfaces. 7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 9. Provide finish painting Work that is uniform, smooth, and free from runs, sags, and clogging

of lines and angles. Paint edges at adjoining materials or colors shall be sharp, straight, and clean.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat

surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush or roller, according to the

manufacturer's written instructions. Spraying is permitted only at exterior soffits.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the

manufacturer for the material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.


PAINTING 09900-10

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical Work is limited to items

exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Mechanical equipment.

7. Accessory items.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards.

H. Block Fillers (If Any): Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by

the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

1. On wood and metal surfaces, paint shall be brushed to a smooth finish. Do not use rollers

without brushing out smooth. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of

even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no

evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,

or repaint Work not complying with requirements.


PAINTING 09900-11

3.06 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect Work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their Work after completing painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.08 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE (Note: Not all systems may occur.)

A. (P-1) Exterior Concrete, and Cement Plaster: Primer: W-709 Eff-Stop. Finish - 2 coats: W-704 Acri-Flat.

B. (P-2) Exterior Concrete Masonry: Block Filler: W-305 Blocfil. Finish - 2 coats: W-704 Acri-Flat. C. (P-3) Exterior Wood Opaque Finish: Primer: 42-9 Apex. Finish - 2 coats: W-901 Permasheen D. (P-4) Exterior Wood Stain Finish: Finish - 2 Coats: W-704 Acri-Flat. E. (P-5) Exterior Ferrous Metal: Primer: 43-5 Corrobar. Finish - 2 coats: W-960 Permagloss. F. (P-6) Exterior Galvanized Metal: Pretreatment: GE 123, Galva-Etch. Primer: W-713 Multiprime. Finish - 2 coats: W-960 Permagloss.

3.09 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE (Note: Not all systems may occur.)

A. (P-10) Interior Concrete and Plaster (Semi-gloss Finish): Primer: W-709 Eff-Stop. Finish - 2 coats: W-450 Decoglo.

B. (P-11) Interior Concrete and Plaster (Eggshell Finish):

Primer: W-709 Eff-Stop. Finish: 2 coats: W-440 Decosheen.


PAINTING 09900-12

C. (P-12) Interior Concrete Masonry (Semi-gloss Finish): Block Filler: W-305 Blocfill. Finish - 2 coats: W-450 Decoglo.

D. (P-13) Interior Drywall (Semi-gloss Finish):

Primer: W-101 Vinylastic. Finish - 2 coats: W-450 Decoglo.

E. (P-14) Interior Drywall (Eggshell Finish):

Primer: W-101 Vinylastic. Finish - 2 coats: W-440 Decosheen.

F. (P-15) Interior Drywall With Alkyd Finish (Where Indicated):

Primer: E22-1 Super U-365. Finish - 2 Coats: 72 Aristosheen Semi-gloss or 73 Aristogloss, as selected by Architect. Verify before application.

G. (P-16) Interior Wood, Opaque Finish:

Primer: E22-1 Super U-365. Finish - 2 coats: W-450 Decoglo.

H. (P-17) Interior Wood Transparent Finish:

Sealer: 1 coat as necessary to even out stain absorption. Stain: 1 coat. Varnish - 3 coats: Polyurethane varnish, gloss as selected.

I. (P-18) Interior Metal:

Primer: 43-5 Corrobar. Finish - 2 coats: W-450 Decoglo. (For galvanized metal use same pretreatment and primer as for P-6)

J. (P-19) Existing Vinyl Wall Covering (If Any) - Semi-gloss Finish: Primer: 42-44 Versa Prime. Finish - 1 Coat: Decoglo.

K. (P-20) Interior Drywall (Gloss Finish):

Primer Over Existing Finish (Roughen and Clean First): W-707 Unikote Waterborne primer. Primer Over New Drywall: W-101 Vinylastic. Finish - 2 coats: W960 Permagloss.

L. (P-21) Acoustic Tile Ceilings:

One coat of white non-bridging water-based paint of thickness necessary to give uniform color.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-1

SECTION 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section


1. This section provides the basic mechanical requirements that apply to the Work of Division 15.


1. Division 16: Electrical.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Current federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) regulations require the furnishing of lead-free pipe, solder, and flux in the installation or repair of plumbing in non-residential facilities connected to public drinking water systems. Under this regulation, solders and flux are considered lead-free when they contain 0.2 percent lead or less. Under California regulations pipes and pipe fittings are considered lead-free when they contain 0.25 percent lead or less as defined in California Assembly Bill 1953 (AB 1953). No pipe, pipe fittings, or any other fitting or fixture intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption by drinking or cooking is allowed in the domestic plumbing system, if they do not meet the low lead definition of AB 1953. Weighted average lead content of the wetted surface area of pipes, fittings and fixtures may not exceed 0.25.

1. Provide lead-free water pipe, solder, and flux materials that meet the standards as outlined by the federal SDWA regulations and California AB 1953 if installed in drinking water system.

2. Collect pipe, solder, and flux material samples as required by the IOR. Test samples shall be delivered to an Owner designated testing laboratory for testing of lead content.

a. Test samples for lead content by the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method.

3. Materials found not conforming to SDWA and California AB 1953 regulations shall be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced with lead-free materials.

4. Comprehensive testing of the remaining materials for their lead content shall be performed as required by the IOR.

B. Workmanship, materials, equipment, and installation shall comply with industry standards and code requirements. Where manufacturer’s recommendations exceed industry standards, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall establish the minimum standard. As a minimum, standards from the following organizations shall apply:



1. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association.

2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

3. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

a. Boiler and Pressure Codes.

b. Code for Pressure Piping.

4. ARI - Air Conditioning Refrigeration Institute.

5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.

6. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.

a. ASTM A53 Specification for Welded and Seamless Pipe.

7. AWA - American Waterworks Association.

8. CSA - Canadian Standards Association.

9. FMG - Factory Mutual Global.

10. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.

11. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

12. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

13. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

14. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

C. Workmanship, materials, equipment, and installation shall comply with federal, state, and local codes including, but not limited to, the following:

1. CBC, CMC, and CPC - latest edition as adopted by the City of Los Angeles, the County of Los Angeles, and the State of California including amendments effective on the Effective Date of the Contract.

2. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Division 1, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety.

3. California Building Code (CBC).

4. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

5. Department of Health.

6. South Coast Air Quality Management District.



D. Specifications or Drawings shall not be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of governing codes unless approval has been obtained from legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and the Architect. The Contract Documents may contain more stringent requirements than those legally required.

E. Permits and Fees: Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300 and with specific requirements of Division 15 sections, as applicable.

B. Submit the following:

1. Complete materials list of items to be furnished and installed under this Division.

2. Shop Drawings, as required.

3. Manufacturer's specifications and other Product Data to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.

4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

5. Catalog cut sheets.

C. After Architect’s approval, the above information shall become the basis for inspecting and testing materials and actual installation procedures performed in the Work.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit one additional copy when control diagrams having line voltage connections are indicated. Shop Drawings shall be specifically prepared for the Work of this Project. Drawings prepared in AutoCAD may be provided by the Architect to serve as a background for the Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be in AutoCAD, shall comply with the requirements of Section 01040 Coordination and Section 01300 Submittals and shall indicate at a minimum:

1. Complete system layout of equipment, components, ductwork, and piping, indicating service clearances, duct and pipe sizes, fitting types and sizes, top or bottom of duct and pipe elevations, distances of ducts, pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger / support locations. All the above items shall be coordinated on the shop drawings according to the requirements of Section 01040.

2. Schedule and description of equipment, ductwork, piping, fittings, valves, dampers, and controllers.

1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 01700: Contract Closeout.

B. Project Record Drawings:

1. Provide a complete set mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and control system drawings in AutoCAD, complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks and



plotter pen color/line thickness settings on CD-ROM. Also submit one set of full size reproducible plots on vellum and 3 sets of prints.

2. Before Contract Completion, deliver corrected and completed prints to the OAR. Delivery of project record documents to the OAR does not relinquish responsibility of furnishing required information omitted from project record documents.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit 2 copies of operation and maintenance manuals in required form and content. If no revisions are required, furnish one additional copy. If revisions are required, one copy shall be returned with instructions for changes; perform such changes and return 3 copies of manuals. Manuals shall be bound in hardback, 3-ring, loose-leaf binders. Deliver manuals to the OAR. Submit an electronic copy of the entire manual in Adobe Acrobat (PDF file) format.

2. Contents of Manual:

a. Title sheet with Project name, including names, addresses and telephone number of Contractor, installer, and related equipment suppliers.

b. Manufacturer's operating instructions including, but not limited to, the following:

1) Identification of components and controls.

2) Pre-start checklist and start-up procedures.

3) Normal operation settings and checklists.

4) Pre-shut down checklist and shut down procedures.

5) Trouble shooting checklist and guidelines.

6) Recommendations for optimum performance.

7) Warnings and safety precautions on improper or hazardous operational procedures or conditions

c. Manufacturer's product data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of equipment furnished under Division 15 that includes the following as a minimum:

1) Manufacturer’s model, identification and serial numbers.

2) Exploded view of assembly drawings identifying each component or part with the relevant part number.

3) Directory of manufacturer’s representatives, service contractors and part distributors.

4) Maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions, including schedule for preventive maintenance, periodic inspection and cleaning criteria.



d. Project Record Drawings: Complete set of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and control system drawings in 50 percent reduced print format shall be furnished with the manual. Submit the above record drawings on CD-ROM in AutoCAD complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks, and plotter pen color/line thickness settings.

e. Test and balance reports: Submit as specified in Section 01450.

f. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) permits to install and operate boilers, water heaters and other fuel burning equipment and third-party source test reports as required by SCAQMD to allow start-up and operation of equipment.

g. Los Angeles County industrial waste permits.

h. Valve directory complete with location, function, size, and model of each valve with reference to the project record drawings.

i. Equipment and component identification chart complete with location, function, size, and model of each equipment or component with reference to the project record drawings.

1.05 PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING

A. In addition to storage criteria of the General Conditions, and provisions under Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, the following shall be provided:

1. Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment until Substantial Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.

2. Protect installed Work.

3. Replacements: In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as required.

4. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to Project site in their original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of delivery. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Do not store plastic pipe or materials in direct sunlight.

6. Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pipe coils, pumps, compressors and similar equipment.

7. Interior of ductwork shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, loose insulation, and other foreign materials.

8. Air handling equipment shall not be operated until building is cleaned and air filters are installed.



9. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive, labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.

10. Before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Tag system with an information tag listing responsible party and date of element, before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas. Refrigerant piping shall be cleaned as specified.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Contract Documents indicate extent and general arrangement of Work under Division 15. Contractor shall coordinate work in accordance with Section 01100 requirements and make adjustments as required to provide maximum headroom, a neat arrangement to keep passageways and openings clear to provide accessibility and provisions for maintenance, and to meet code requirements.


A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to Project site in their original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of delivery. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Do not store plastic pipe or materials in direct sunlight.

1.08 PRELIMINARY OPERATION

A. OAR may require any portion of mechanical Work to be operated before Substantial Completion. Such operation shall be in addition to regular tests, demonstrations and instructions required under the Contract Documents, and shall be performed as required.

B. Notify the IOR at least 24 hours in advance of lighting or re-lighting pilots.

1.09 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. Training of Owner’s personnel shall include:

1. A minimum of 4 hours of on-site overview of the overall Mechanical System.

2. Refer to Division 15 sections for specific training on each of the components of the Mechanical System.

B. Contract shall include the cost of training Owner operation and maintenance personnel in operating, adjusting, maintenance, trouble-shooting, and Project site repair of each component, equipment, or system provided under this Contract.

C. Operational and maintenance training shall be conducted on the Project site, unless indicated otherwise.



D. Upon completion of Owner training, a completion certificate indicating the nature of the training and a description of the systems, complete with equipment and component lists shall be issued to each trainee. The certificate should be issued in duplicate with one copy retained by OAR.

E. An attendance sheet with the names and signatures of all participants attending the training shall be submitted to the OAR and kept as part of the project documents.

1.10 GUARANTEES AND DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY

A. Sound of water flowing in piping shall not be transmitted to building structure. Operation of mechanical system shall not produce operational sounds that can be heard outside of rooms enclosing apparatus or equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be new, in good and clean condition. Equipment, materials, and components shall be of the make; type and model number noted on Drawings or specified. Pieces of equipment of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.

B. Whenever an item is listed by a single proprietary name, with or without model number and type, it shall be for purpose of design only, to indicate characteristics and quality desired. Proprietary designation listed on Drawings, or listed first in Specifications, is used as a basis for design to establish a standard for quality and performance and space requirements.

C. HVAC equipment products from different manufacturers are never identical. Equipment approved as being equal is interpreted as being equivalent in capacity, performance and quality. The dimensions, weight, configuration and utility requirements could be quite different from the equipment used as the basis of design. Due to these differences, additional coordination and adjustments by the Contractor are required. For the equipment to be deemed truly equal, the additional coordination and adjustments by the Contractor should not incur any additional cost to the Owner and any additional labor to the design team.

D. Equipment and materials indicated or required to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed, manufactured, listed or approved by authorities having jurisdiction for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse effects of weather. All the additional protective measures against outdoor weather required by the manufacturers’ installation instructions and prevalent practice shall be provided.

E. For substitution of materials or products, refer to the General Conditions.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS, OFF-SITE, GAS AND WATER

A. Schedule Work so there shall be no service interruptions of existing systems or systems during normal hours of operation of affected systems and/or facilities.

B. When service interruptions are mandatory, arrange in advance with the OAR as to time and date of such interruptions.



C. Systems, which are interrupted, shall be returned back into operation in such manner that they will function as originally intended.

3.02 CUTTING, NOTCHING AND BACKING

A. Conform to California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, Sections 2308.9.10 and 2308.9.11, for notches and bored holes in wood; Section 1906A.3, for pipes and sleeves embedded in concrete and for cuts in steel, as detailed on structural Drawings.

B. Where pipes or ducts pass through, or are located within one inch of any construction element, install a resilient pad, 1/2 inch thick minimum, to prevent contact.

C. Furnish all necessary provisions for recesses, chases, accesses, and provide blocking and backing as necessary for proper reception and installation of mechanical Work.

3.03 LOCATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Location of piping, apparatus, and equipment as indicated on Drawings is approximate and shall be altered to avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and provide free and clear openings and passageways.

B. Trenches parallel to footings shall not be closer than 18 inches to the face of footings and shall not be below a plane having a downward slope of 2 horizontal to one vertical, from a line 9 inches above bottom of footing.

C. Pipe in tunnels shall be installed close to one side of tunnel to provide maximum space for passage. Pipe shall not be installed through crawl hole unless otherwise specified or detailed on Drawings.

D. Place equipment in locations and spaces indicated, disassemble and/or reassemble equipment as required by Project conditions.

3.04 TESTS AND TESTING

A. Tests shall be as required under the applicable sections of Division 15, including this section.

B. Tests required by other sections of the Contract Documents include the following:

1. Test and balance of mechanical equipment and systems: Refer to Section 01450: Test and Balance

2. Hydrostatic test of boilers: Refer to Section 01450: Test and Balance

3. Test of smoke and fire detectors: Refer to Division 16: Electrical

C. Additional tests may be required in the case of products, materials, and equipment if:

1. Submitted items are altered, changed, or cannot be determined as exactly conforming to the Contract Documents.

2. Performance testing and results may also be required on certain items which are as specified, including fan, and pump performance.



D. Piping Tests:

1. Perform tests required to demonstrate that operation of mechanical systems and their parts are in accordance with Specifications covering each item or system, and furnish materials, instruments and equipment necessary to conduct such tests. Tests shall be performed in presence of the IOR, and representatives of any governmental agency having jurisdiction. Work shall not be concealed or covered until required results are provided.

2. If required tests are not performed, Owner may provide in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Pressure gauges furnished in testing shall comply with CPC. Air shall be bled from lines requiring hydrostatic or water tests.

4. Systems shall be pressure-tested in accordance with pipe testing schedule below. Pipe test shall indicate no loss in pressure after a minimum duration of 4 hours at test pressures indicated. Where local codes require higher test pressures than specified herein for fire sprinkler systems, local codes shall govern.

5. Fuel gas lines shall be first tested with piping exposed, before backfilling trenches or lathing; second with piping in finished arrangement, backfilled and paved where required, and walls finished.

6. Refrigerant piping may be tested with a halide detector or calibrated electronic testing equipment.

7. Piping systems may be tested as a unit or in sections, but entire system shall successfully meet requirements specified herein, before final testing by the IOR.

8. Repair of damage to pipes and their appurtenances or to any other structures resulting from or caused by these tests, shall be provided.

E. Pipe Testing Schedule:

System Tested Test Pressure (psig) Test With: Durham system, glass or plastic acid waste, vent and roof drain (except pipes running under a slab or underground)

Fill with water to top of highest vent, allow to stand two hours, or longer, as required by Inspector. Minimum head required for any joint shall be 10-feet in building.

Water

Cast-iron soil, waste and interior downspout, condensate drain from air conditioning equipment

10' of water, vertically

Storm water disposal lines Running water test Water

Steam piping, hot water heating system piping and chilled water piping

150 Water

Vacuum pump or condensate pump discharge and condensate

150 Water



return piping

Domestic water piping 200 Water Standpipes, wet or dry 300 Water Fire sprinkler piping 200 Water Gas piping(steel threaded or plastic)

60 (both tests) Air

Gas piping (steel welded) 100 (both tests) Air Gas welding station 1-1/2 Working pressure 100 min. Dry nitrogen

Compressed air piping 175 Air Refrigeration piping

R-22 400 Dry nitrogen R-134a 300 Dry nitrogen R-401a 300 Dry nitrogen R-401b 300 Dry nitrogen R-404a 500 Dry nitrogen R-407c 500 Dry nitrogen

R-410a 600 Dry nitrogen R-507 500 Dry nitrogen

Radiant panel piping 150 Water

F. Equipment Performance Assurance Tests:

1. Before operating any equipment or systems, a thorough check shall be performed to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and that equipment has been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, and serviced. Factory instructions shall be checked to verify installations have been completed, recommended lubricants have been installed in bearings, gearboxes, crankcases, and similar equipment. Particular care shall be furnished in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Equipment shall also be checked for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Damaged equipment, products, and/or materials shall be replaced or repaired as required.

2. Upon completion of the above, adjust the system settings to within normal operating conditions to prevent the system from being damaged upon start-up.

3. Run-test the equipment after start-up for five consecutive days. Tests shall include operation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment and systems for a period of not less than two 8 hour periods at 90 percent of the full specified heating and cooling capacities. If equipment passes, install new filters. If equipment fails, it shall be adjusted and retested until system meets all applicable codes.

4. Equipment Start-up Reports: For each equipment or system on which start-up is performed, submit 8 copies of start-up report for review by the Architect.

a. The start-up report shall include the manufacturer's standard start-up form completed and signed by the start-up technician.

5. Provide, maintain, and pay costs for equipment, instruments, and operating personnel as required for specified tests.



6. Provide electric energy and fuel required for tests.

7. Final adjustment to equipment or systems shall meet specified performance requirements.

8. Equipment, systems, or Work deemed defective during testing shall be replaced or corrected as required. Test until satisfactory results are provided.

G. Specific Coordinated Plan for Test & Balance:

1. Provide a narrative of the operational intent that clearly describes the function and sequence of operation of each component, equipment, or system installed. Instruct designated Owner personnel in the operation of the installed systems.

2. Prior to final test and balance, mechanical equipment and systems shall be operated and tested as indicated in Article F above to demonstrate satisfactory overall operation of the installed systems.

3. Immediately before starting tests, air filter media shall be cleaned or renewed. Roll-type filters shall be advanced to provide new clean media. Cleanable type media shall be thoroughly cleaned and re-oiled with new, clean oil as recommended by manufacturer if they are of viscous impingement type. Disposable type filters shall be replaced with new filters. Replaceable media shall be replaced with new media.

4. An accurate means of measuring air flow and temperatures shall be furnished to balance air supply, return, and exhaust systems so uniform temperatures occur in every room and design airflow is obtained through registers, diffusers, and grilles.

5. Systems shall be adjusted to provide airflows indicated including maximum fresh air and maximum return air. Dampers shall be checked for proper settings and operation. Air and water inlet and leaving temperatures at coils shall be checked. Complete operational data including airflows, room temperatures, fan speeds, motor currents, plenum, and duct static pressures shall be tabulated.

6. Welding performed as part of this Division may be subject to radiographic inspections at random in accordance with requirements specified in Section 15050: Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

3.05 NOISE AND VIBRATION REDUCTION

A. Correct noise or vibration caused by mechanical systems. Provide all necessary adjustments to specified and installed equipment and accessories to reduce noise to the lowest possible level

B. Correct noise or vibration problems caused by failure to install work in accordance with Contract Documents. Include all labor and materials required as a result of such failure. Pay for re-testing of corrected noise or vibration problems by the project acoustical consultant including travel, lodging, test equipment expenses, etc.

3.06 PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING

A. In addition to storage criteria of the General Conditions, and provisions under Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, the following shall be provided:



1. Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment until Substantial Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.

2. Protect installed Work.

3. Replacements: In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as required.

4. Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pipe coils, pumps, compressors and similar equipment.

5. Interior of ductwork shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, loose insulation, and other foreign materials.

6. Air handling equipment shall not be operated until building is cleaned and air filters are installed.

7. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive, labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.

8. Before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Tag system with an information tag listing responsible party and date of element, before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas. Refrigerant piping shall be cleaned as specified.

END OF SECTION


AIR TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 15840-1

SECTION 15840 AIR TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL

Division 1 requirements apply to this Section. 1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Low pressure ductwork. 2. Diffusers, registers and grilles. 3. Dampers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 15800: Air Conditioning and Air Handling Equipment

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Requirements: In addition to the requirements of Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS, the submittal material shall include six (6) copies of descriptive data for all products and materials including, but not limited to the following.

1. Descriptive data.

a. Grilles, registers and diffusers.

b. Dampers.

c. Ductwork accessories.

2. Shop Drawings.

a. Ductwork typical construction.

b. Ductwork layouts.

c. Tabulation of all air supply grilles, registers and diffusers listing location,

size, air volume, flow and sound generated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. General.

1. Galvanized steel sheets shall be first quality cold rolled, galvanized, open hearth soft steel, capable of double seaming without fracture, meeting ASTM 526-64T.

2. Stainless steel sheets shall be type 316 18-8 stainless, No. 4 finish where exposed



in regularly occupied areas.

3. Steel shapes shall be hot rolled, galvanized.

4. Screws and bolts shall be cadmium plated.

5. Materials and fabrication shall comply with Uniform Mechanical Code Standard 4-2 and Chapter 10, latest edition.

B. Materials, Application.

1. Low pressure ductwork except for special exhaust system shall be galvanized steel.

2. Transverse joints in rectangular ducts may be manufactured type similar to

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

C. Circular ducts.

1. Circular (across section) ducts shall be galvanized steel of spiral seam construction, fittings shall have continuous, welded, stamped construction both manufactured by United Sheet Metal, Omniduct, Spiromatic, Spiro-Duct or approved equal.

2. Make joints between two ducts with beaded sleeve joint, with duct sealer applied to

make end, mechanically fastened with sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Sealing of ductwork shall be as specified hereinafter.

3. Radius of elbows shall be minimum of 1-1/2 times diameter or maximum width of

duct. Gored ells are not acceptable.

4. Tee fittings shall be of conical type changing in shape from round to rectangular with transformation joint with minimum of 1 to 7 taper.

5. Circular ducts with liner shall be United Sheet Metal, Spiromatic, Circliner or

approved equal.

a. Duct shall be of double wall construction consisting of galvanized steel outer and inner wall with a layer of one inch thick fiberglass insulation between the walls. Inner face of the insulation shall be faced with mylar film to prevent erosion or harbor bacteria.

b. Inner wall shall have perforations of approximately 2/32" diameter, and the

percentage of open area shall be approximately 22%.

c. Support the inner wall by metal spacer welded in position.

D. Access doors.

1. For square ducts.

a. Access doors shall be of size to permit inspection and adjustment and replacement of fire damper links, fan bearings, etc. through access opening. The minimum size shall be 12" x 12" x 26 gauge in furred spaces and 18" x 22 gauge in equipment rooms and areas, wherever possible.



Demonstrate adequacy of size as required by the Engineer.

b. Door shall be double wall type with felt or foam rubber gasket seal and shall have butt hinges and sash locks on 2-opposite sides, at a maximum spacing of 9". Use sash locks on both sides where hinged door swings may be obstructed.

c. Door in insulated ducts shall contain a full thickness of insulation between

the door panels.

2. Access doors for circular ducts shall be United Sheet Metal Type AR-W, Omniduct, Spiromatic, Spiro-Duct, or approved equal.

2.02 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manual volume dampers.

1. Dampers installed in ductwork, in furred ceiling spaces or in roof spaces with less than 30" of clearance below beams, joints or other construction, and where access panels are not provided shall have damper rods extended below ceiling and terminated with a concealed damper regulator, Ventlok, Young, or approved equal.

2. Damper blades shall not exceed 10" in width and shall be a minimum of 16-gauge

galvanized steel, or 14-gauge aluminum. All dampers shall be frame mounted. The damper frame shall be of minimum 13-gauge steel channel. Except that dampers less than 18" maximum size may have 16-gauge by 1-1/4" minimum flat bar stock frames. Multi blade dampers shall be arranged for opposed blade operation.

3. Steel parts shall be galvanized or factory-finished with a metal primer and

enameled finish. All parts of dampers in outside air intakes shall be galvanized. Bearings shall be precision sleeve type of oil-impregnated bronze, Teflon or Nylon.

4. Dampers and hardware for stainless steel ducts used for corrosive air shall be

stainless steel to match duct.

5. Provide locking and indicating quadrants, Ventlok or Duro-Dyne, installed in accessible locations. For wrapped ducts, quadrants shall be bracket mounted with a recessed flange.

6. Where dampers are inaccessible for adjustments, provide Ventfabrics No. 666, or equal by going Regulator Co.; with rod extension to damper.

B. Gravity dampers or backdraft dampers. Gravity dampers shall have aluminum blades with

felt seals mounted in a 16-gauge steel frame. Bearings shall be precision machined oil-impregnated bronze, Teflon or Nylon of the sleeve type. The steel frame shall be factory-finished with metal primer and enamel finish, American Venting, Inc. or approved equal.

C. Motor operated dampers.

1. Dampers and operators shall be furnished under Section 15900, Control System.

be provided for each unit. 2.03 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT



A. General. 1. Refer to submittals, Paragraph 1.02.

2. Equipment shall provide required air flow, throw and spread without drafts or noise.

3. Size of supply, return, exhaust outlets and inlets as indicated on the drawings are

approximate only. Sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer to meet the noise criteria requirements of the area served as recommended by the ASHRAE Guide as a minimum, with drafts (air velocities) at the occupancy level not in excess of 50 FPM.

4. Provide all accessories required to effect these conditions.

5. Replace all grilles, registers, dampers or diffusers causing excessive drafts or noise

at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Performance ratings shall be certified by the ADC.

7. Noise level ratings shall be in accordance with ADC Test Code No. 1062RI and ASHRAE Standards 36-62 and 36B-63.

8. Test room and test instruments shall be ADC approved.

9. Manufacturer: Air distribution equipment shall be of specified types manufactured

by Anemostat, Price, Kruger, Titus or approved equal. B. Air distribution equipment types.

1. Exhaust air and return air registers in rooms without lay-in T-Bar ceiling shall be

Anemostat S3HOD, horizontal face bars set at an angle of 45-degrees with OBD and flexible duct adaptor.

2. Ceiling diffusers in rooms without lay-in T-Bar ceiling shall be Anemostat RMD-S or

approved equal. Modular ceiling diffuser with OBD.

3. Screened opening shall be No. 16 ga. wire 1/2" mesh galvanized mounted in a metal frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND PLENUMS

A. General.

1. Install ductwork of sizes, runs and connections as shown on the drawings.

2. All sheet metal construction not shown or specified shall be constructed to conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards latest edition."

3. Verify all dimensions at the site, making all field measurements and shop drawings

necessary for fabrication and erection of sheet metal work. Make allowances for beams, pipes or other obstructions in building construction and for the work of other



sections. Check plans showing work of other trades and consult with Engineer in the event of any potential interference.

4. Fabricate ductwork in workmanlike manner with airtight joints, presenting smooth

surfaces on inside, neatly finished on outside, construct with curves, bends, turning vanes to aid the easy flow of air.

5. Install ductwork at maximum practical height above the work of other trades

whenever possible so as to clear all obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear, whether shown on plans or not. The use of variation in duct sizes and additional duct fittings will be allowed, if required, to clear minor obstructions and maintain clearances. These shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Make such changes without additional cost to the Owner.

6. Increase ducts and plenums sizes lined with insulation to allow for insulation

thickness so that dimensions shown on plans will be net inside dimension.

7. Pipes, conduits, tie or hanger rods or other work shall not pierce and/or pass through the air passageway of ducts or plenum except where shown.

8. Make internal ends of "S" slip joints in direction of airflow.

9. For pocket lock transverse joints, the pocket frame shall be made 1/8" smaller than

the ducts in both dimensions (width and depth) for ease of field locking. All clips used in the flanges shall be of the same gauge as duct material.

10. Intermediate reinforcement shall be on all four sides of duct, bolted together and

bolted or riveted to the duct.

11. Ductwork shall have rectangular or circular cross-section as shown on drawings.

12. Rectangular ducts shall be diagonally creased (crossbroken) in both directions or machine beaded on all four sides. Circular ducts shall be spirally seamed.

13. Longitudinal seams shall be hammered airtight.

14. Caulk automatic damper frames airtight.

15. Caulk ductwork connecting to fresh air intakes watertight for a minimum length

equal to the height and shall be installed to pitch to intakes and drain to outside of building.

16. Clean all direct and foreign matter from ductwork, and clean diffusers, registers and

grilles.

17. Round duct may be substituted for rectangular duct and vice versa, maintianing the same cross sectional area. Submit for approval.

B. Construct low pressure rectangular steel ductwork, for static pressures of 2" w.g. or less,

positive or negative as follows:

1. Wall thickness shall be:

Maximum Duct Size



In Inches US. Standard Gauge

Up through 12 26 13 through 30 24

2. Construction shall be:

a. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock seams.

b. Transverse or cross joints and duct reinforcing shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

3. Sealing Joints.

a. Make all cross joints and all transverse joints of all metal ducts airtight by

covering with 6" wide strips of six (6) ounce canvas (2.85 sq.yds. per lb., 48 x 48 thread count) cemented on with an arabol type waterproof lagging adhesive. Dip canvas strips into lagging adhesive and smooth around and over all seams to work out all air bubbles or balloons.

b. Seal punched holes and corner cracks with mastic. c. Manufactured seams shall be sealed as recommended by the Manufacturer

except that leaks shall be sealed by same method as 3.a. above.

C. Duct Hangers.

1. Duct supports for rectangular ducts shall be in accordance with Table No. 10-E and Section 1004 of the Uniform Mechanical Code, except hanger spacing shall be 5'-0" maximum.

a. Single horizontal ducts shall have hanger straps double bolted to

transverse joints, to reinforcing angles, or extended continuously under the ducts and riveted or screwed to both sides. (For new overhead concrete construction, the hangers shall be double bolted to inserts which shall be fabricated of the same material as the hangers or secured to manufactured concrete inserts). (For existing concrete, hangers shall be bolted to 1-1/2" x 1/8" rolled steel angle iron clips which shall be secured to construction with 1/4" bolt size self-drilling expansion shields). (For concrete construction, over six months old, percussion driven 3/8" diameter flat head pins with minimum .150" diameter shank 1-1/2" long may be used if approved by Architect).

b. For metal deck construction, double bolt the hangers to inserts of the same

material as the hanger inserted in slots in the decking prior to concrete deck pour.

c. Where ducts are run one above the other, they shall be individually

supported on a trapeze of steel singles with threaded steel rods and full-size nuts securely fastened to the overhead construction with inserts, expansion shields, or bolted clip angles. Maintain a distance of 3" between ducts wherever possible, but in no event shall the distance be less than 2". The minimum sizes of the horizontal angles and the hanger rods shall be in accordance with Table 10-E, Part III, of the Uniform Mechanical Code.

d. Support vertical ducts with bolted angles located at each floor on each side



of each duct. Angles shall be in accordance with Table 10-E, Part I, of the Uniform Mechanical Code.

3. Earthquake restraints shall be in accordance with SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic

Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems, latest edition.

E. Plenum Construction.

1. Construct Plenums in accordance with SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standard, latest edition. This section is general and does not show arrangement of a particular installation.

2. Add additional angles for reinforcing, bracing, or supporting when required by the

Engineer to prevent bulging, sagging, breathing, or vibration in excess of 1% of span at the center of the span.

3. Make plenum doors of No. 18 USS gauge galvanized steel, 20" x 54" size minimum.

Reinforce doors with steel angle stiffeners and close on an angle reinforced opening. Provide adequate hinges on each door for a tight rigid connection and provide cinch type latches that will draw door tightly closed and will be operable from both sides of door by means of lever handles. The handles and latches shall be "Ventlok" No. 260, or equivalent by Elgin or Duro-Dyne. Install felt or rubber gaskets completely around each door to provide an airtight fit. Doors shall be arranged to open against air pressure.

4. Seal seams around filter and coil housing and all plenums with caulking compound.

Examine all plenum spaces carefully to assure that they will be airtight. Seal all openings airtight where ducts, pipes, and conduits pierce the plenum spaces.

5. Joint caulking or sealing compound shall be 3M Standard Grade Duct Sealer, Tuff-

Bond No. 29, Permacel No. EZ-4719, United Duct Sealer, Benjamin Foster No. 30-02, or Chicago Mastic #10-108, as recommended and guaranteed by the Manufacturer for this specified application and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Transitions - all ductwork.

1. Taper sides of ducts in a diverging airflow maximum of 1 to 8 slope per side.

2. Taper sides of ducts in a converging airflow maximum of 1 to 4 taper.

G. Duct elbows - rectangular ducts.

1. All duct elbows, including supply, exhaust, and return shall be either square or

made with the inside radius ells to accomplish this radius requirement.

2. Square elbows may be used instead of radius type and shall be fitted with turning vanes whether shown on the drawings or not. The turning vanes shall be as shown in SMACNA duct manual, except that the first vane shall be tightly fitted against the heel of the elbow. Shop fabricated duct turns may be used, provided that they are mounted in manufactured rails and are submitted and approved by the Engineer. Duct turning vanes shall be of the same metal as ductwork. Except where space will not otherwise permit, a duct size change in the elbow is not acceptable.



3. All duct offsets and branches to more than one outlet shall be made with elbows,

except that each change in direction may be made with a single mitered joint in lieu of an elbow provided the change is not more than 1 to 5.

4. For all branch duct connections, a 90-degree, tap-in type connection may be used.

Such connections will not require an outside radius on the branch ducts, and the inside radius may be a 45-degree angle of length equal to 20% of branch duct width. A branch duct is any duct which does not rebranch.

H. Flexible duct connection: Provide 16-ounce neoprene impregnated glass fabric at all

connections to fans. Install with metal collar frames at each end of connections. Attach fabric tightly to ducts. Allow at least 1-inch slack in connections. Make fabric connections minimum 4-inches long. Ventfabrics, Duro-Dyne or approved equal.

I. Flashing ducts through roof: Install flashing to cover top and sides of curb and fit closely

around duct. Cover top edge of base flashing with collar soldered to duct and turned down over base flashing. Fabricate flashing from 24-gauge galvanizing steel.

J. Support ducts above roof with 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1/8" angles (minimum), fitted with 6" X 6" X

1/8" thick base plate all welded construction. See detail on drawings. Secure base plate to roof structure and set in pitch pocket.

K. Test holes: Drill instrument test holes into ductwork for pitot tube tests where required by

testing agency under equipment & Systems Tests Section 15042. Install Ventlok No. 699 and/or 699-2 instrument plugs.

L. Provide and install access doors in ducts where fire, smoke or automatic dampers, fan

bearings, filters, humidifiers or other equipment is installed in ducts.

M. Provide and deliver to the appropriate trade for installation where you direct, access doors or panels in building construction for access to duct doors or panels, damper quadrants, control devices, or other devices requiring access.

N. Duct liner.

1. Ducts and plenums shall be lined as specified in Section 15180, "Insulation".

3.02 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A. General.

1. Install all ductwork, equipment and accessories to permit access for maintenance.

2. Any relocation of conduit, piping, equipment and accessories required to provide maintenance access shall be accomplished by the Contractor at no additional cost.

B. Access.

1. Provide access doors where any dampers, instruments, controls, motors and other

equipment requiring access for servicing, repairs, or replacement are located behind walls, chases or above non-removable ceilings.

2. The location of access doors shall be coordinated with and installed by the



applicable trade installing walls or ceilings.

3. The Contractor shall arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus.

3.03 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES INSTALLATION

A. Coordination with ceiling features.

1. Install all inlets and outlets as close as possible to that shown on the plans but adjust to fit into the ceiling materials shown on the Architectural, Electrical and Fire Sprinkler plans.

2. In dry wall and plaster ceilings, diffuser, register or grilled trim shall overlap the

plaster line with adequate trim.

3. In ceilings with acoustic tile adhesively applied to drywall or plaster ceilings, furnish diffusers, registers or grilles with overlapping margins.

4. In perforated metal plan systems: Square or rectangular diffuser and grille edge

trim shall be flush with the finished ceiling.

5. Furnish and install plaster frames for diffusers, grilles and registers which are located on finish plaster surfaces. Plaster frames for grilles and registers shall be set flush with the finished surface and attached to ductwork by hickey punching, with rivets or sheet metal screws. Grilles and registers shall be fastened to the frames with sheet metal screws. All inlet and outlet devices shall be gasketed for air tight mounting.

6. Provide any intake duct not protected by a louver, grille or register with a 1//4" mesh

galvanized screen over open end.

7. Paint all ductwork visible through grilles, registers, and other openings with one coat of flat black paint.

END OF SECTION


BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section provides the Basic Electrical Requirements which supplement Document 00700: General Conditions and apply to all Sections in Division 16.


A. Division 16 sections.

1.03 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Quality Assurance:

1. Electrical work shall be done by an Electrical Contractor holding a C-10 and other licenses and permits required.

2. See other sections of these specifications for other qualification requirements.

B. Drawings and Specifications Coordination:

1. For purposes of clearness and legibility, Electrical Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Size and location of equipment is indicated to scale whenever possible. Contractor shall verify all conditions, data and information as indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections where Electrical work is required.

2. Electrical Drawings indicate required size and points of termination of conduits, number and size of wires, and suggest proper route for conduit. It shall be responsibility of Contractor to install conduits with minimum number of bends to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and meet all applicable code requirements. Routing of conduits may be changed, if approved by the District Electrical Inspector, provided that the length of any conduit run is not increased or decreased more than 10% of length indicated on Drawings.

3. It is intended that outlets be located symmetrical with Architectural elements notwithstanding fact that locations indicated on Drawings may be distorted for clarity.

4. Architectural and Structural Drawings take precedence over Electrical Drawings in representation of general construction work. Drawings of various trades take precedence in representation of work of those trades. Contractor shall refer to all Drawings to coordinate the Electrical work with work of other trades.

C. Terminology:

1. Term "signal system" shall apply to clock, bell, fire alarm, annunciator, sound, public address, buzzer, public telephone, television, inter-communication, and security systems.

2. Term "low voltage" shall apply to systems operating at 600 volts and under.

3. Term "provide" used on Drawings and elsewhere in the Specifications shall be considered to mean "furnish and install".

4. Term "UL" means Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. Regulations:



1. Electrical work shall meet requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction and the California Building Code, 1995 Edition. Material and labor shall conform to Regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters for Electrical Wiring and Apparatus. All material shall be new and shall be "UL" listed.

E. Structural Considerations for Conduit Routing:

1. Where conduits are to pass through or will interfere with any Structural member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, or where special openings are required through walls, floors, footings, or other buildings elements, to accommodate the electrical work, such work shall conform to State Building Code, Part 2, Title 24, Section 1906 for conduits and pipes embedded in concrete and Section 2326.11.9 and 2326.11.10 for notches and bored holes in wood; for steel, as detailed on the Structural Drawings.

2. Where a concrete encasement for underground conduit abuts a foundation wall or underground structure which the conduits enter, encasement shall, rest on a haunch integral with wall or structure, or shall extend down to footing projection, if any, or shall be doweled into structure unless otherwise indicated. Underground structures shall include maintenance holes, pull boxes, vaults and buildings.

3. Holes required for conduit entrances into speaker poles, floodlight poles or other poles, shall be drilled and conduit nipple or coupling shall be welded to poles. Welds shall be by the electric arc process and shall be continuous around nipple or coupling.

F. Electrically Operated Equipment and Appliances:

1. Equipment and Appliances Furnished by Contractor:

a. Electrical work shall include furnishing and installing wiring enclosures for, and the complete connection of all electrically operated equipment and appliances and any electrical control devices which are specified to be furnished and installed in this or other Electrical Sections of these Specifications, except Electrical work specified or indicated to be in the Mechanical work. All wiring enclosures shall be installed concealed except where exposed work is indicated on Electrical Drawings.

b. Connections shall be made as necessary to completely install equipment ready for use. Equipment shall be tested for proper operation and, if motorized, for proper rotation. If outlets of incorrect Electrical characteristics or if any equipment fails to operate properly, Contractor shall report to the District's Inspector in writing, listing buildings and rooms in which located, the name, make and serial number of equipment, and a description of defect.

2. Equipment and Appliances Furnished by Others:

a. Equipment and appliances indicated on Drawings as N.I.C. (Not in Contract),"Furnished by Others", or "Furnished by the District", will be delivered to the Site.

b. Required Electrical connections shall be made for all such equipment and appliances in accordance with accepted trade practices under direction of the District Electrical Inspector. All motorized equipment will be furnished factory wired to a control panel or junction box unless otherwise indicated. Appliances will be furnished equipped with portable cord and cap. Provide disconnect switches where required.



c. Connections to equipment furnished under other Sections of this Specification shall be part of the Electrical Work. Work shall include internal wiring, installation, connection and adjustment of bolted drive motors in which the motor is supplied as a separate unit and connections only for equipment furnished with factory installed internal wiring, except as further limited by Drawings and other Sections of this Specification. Work shall include furnishing and installing suitable outlets, disconnect-ing devices, starters, push button stations, selector switches, conduit, junction boxes, and wiring necessary for a complete Electrical installation. Work shall also include furnishing and installing conduit and boxes, for HVAC control system, furnished under Mechanical. Devices and equipment furnished shall be of same type used elsewhere on job or as specified.

d. Electrical equipment furnished under other Sections of this Specification for installation and connection under work of this Section shall be delivered to the installation location by the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

e. Mechanical equipment furnished under other Sections of this Specification, and requiring Electrical connection under this Section, will be set in place by Contractor furnishing equipment.

f. Suitability and condition of equipment furnished by other Sections of this Specification shall be determined in advance of installation. Immediate notice of damage, unsuitability or lack of parts shall be given to the Architect.

G. Protection of Materials

1. Provide for safety and good condition of all materials and equipment until final acceptance of project by the District.

2. Protect all materials and equipment from damage and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during progress of work. All damaged and defective work shall be replaced prior to final inspection.

H. Cleaning

1. Exposed parts of electrical work shall be left in a neat, clean, usable condition. Finished painted surfaces shall be unblemished and metal surfaces shall be polished.

2. Thoroughly clean all parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials. Remove grease and oil spots with solvent. Such surfaces shall be wiped and all corners and cracks scraped out. Exposed rough metal work shall be smooth, free of sharp edges, carefully steel brushed to remove rust and other spots, and left in proper condition to receive finish painting.

3. Contractor shall remove from the Site all debris and rubbish caused by the electrical work. He shall thoroughly clean building of dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., caused by performance of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Consult with District Electrical Inspector before starting work.

B. All exposed conduits, raceways and boxes shall be painted to match the surfaces adjacent to installation. Refer to Section 09900: Painting.

C. All existing materials removed from buildings shall be removed from site as directed by District Electrical inspector.

D. Coordinate electrical work with the work of other trades.

E. All trenches outside of barricade limits shall be backfilled and paved no later than 72 hours after being opened. During the time that trenches are open in traffic areas. The Contractor shall provide traffic plates.

F. Where existing structural walls are cored for new conduit runs, separation between cored holes shall be three inches from new or existing holes, unless directed otherwise by structural engineer.

G. All electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction using the following criteria:

Fixed Equipment on Grade 20% of operating weight Fixed Equipment on Structure 30% of operating weight Emergency power and Communication Equipment on Grade 40% of operating weight Emergency power and Communication Equipment on Structure 60% of operating weight Flexible mounted equipment use 2x the above values. Simultaneous vertical force use 1/3x horizontal force. Where anchorage details are not indicated

on drawings, the field installation shall be subject to approval of Structural Engineer and the DSA Field Engineer.

H. The representation of physical placement of existing conduits has been developed from the

best information available to the District at the time the drawings were prepared. The District provides this information only as a general guideline for the convenience of Bidders/Contractors and does not guarantee or warrant in any way, expressed or implied, the accuracy of these representations. Nothing in this disclaimer affects, in any way, the duty of the Contractor to furnish accurate “As Built” Drawings after completion of the contract.

I. In existing buildings, Contractors shall not work in areas contaminated by asbestos until the asbestos materials have been removed or encapsulated.

J. When trenching for new underground conduits, exercise care to avoid damage to existing underground utilities. Contractor shall review existing as builts and scan the site to determine the location of existing underground pipes, conduits and structures. Contractor must make allowances in the bid for avoiding damage to existing underground piping, conduit and structures and to adjust the routing of new underground conduits and location of new underground pull boxes, vaults and maintenance holes.

END OF SECTION


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1

SECTION 16050

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. General: Requirements in Addenda, Conditions and Division 1 collectively apply to this work.

1. Examination of site prior to bidding: Supplementary Conditions, Section 00800, Article 1.04.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Principal Work Items are: Provide all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete and test the electrical work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Modification to existing 208/120v, 3-phase, 4-wire electrical distribution system to provide new circuits to equipment in gymnasium.

2. Furnish and install all hangers, anchors, sleeves, and supports required for electrical work.

3. Modification to existing Fire Detection and Alarm System to connect to new HVAC systems in restrooms.

4. Modification to the existing intercom and telephone system to remove and replace and reconnect equipment, devices and circuits interrupted during construction.

5. Installation of new lighting fixtures to replace existing and installation of all California Energy code mandatory lighting control features.

6. Closing of all openings resulting from coring, sleeving, removal of conduit and/or equipment.

7. Cleaning, patching, repairing and painting.

8. Permits and Code inspection fees.

9. Prime coat painting of all electrical equipment exposed to view in public areas.

10. Shop drawings and technical product data; instructions and maintenance manuals.

11. Tests of all equipment and systems installed.

12. Operating instructions.

13. "As-built” drawings.

14. Incidental items not indicated on the drawings nor mentioned in the specifications that belong to the work described, or are required to provide complete systems, as though called out here in every detail.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: For detailed description of the electrical work, also see other Sections in Division 16 of these Specifications. Refer to the following Sections of the Specification for related work:

1. Electrical Drawings.



C. Work in Cooperation with Other Trades:

1. Examine the Drawings and Specifications and determine the work to be performed by the electrical, mechanical, and other trades. Provide the type and amount of electrical materials and equipment necessary to place this work in proper operation, completely wired, tested, and ready for use. This shall include all conduit, wire, motor starters, disconnects, relays, and all other devices for the required operation and control sequences of all electrical, mechanical, and other systems or equipment.

2. Provide conduit and wire for all controls and other devices, both line and low voltage, described in this or other parts of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. Install all control housings and back boxes required for installing conduit and wire to the controls except for controls such as solenoid valves, pressure switches, damper motors, aqua-stats, and other items which are to be installed in piping, ducts, tanks, machinery, or other equipment. These items shall be installed by craftsmen of the appropriate trade.

3. Install control wiring in separate conduit between all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning sensing devices, its control panel and/or control motor. Before installing any conduit for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning control wiring, verify from the control manufacturer's Shop Drawings where these separate conduit runs are required and determine exact terminal points for the specific items to be wired.

4. All work including conduit, wiring, disconnects, motor starters, local and remote detectors and controls, and other devices required for the proper operation of a "package unit" or a "package system" shall be provided under the Section in which the unit or system is specified, except for the following items which shall be provided under the Sections of Division 16.

a. Line side conduit, wiring and connections to the "package unit" or "package system" disconnect or motor starter.

b. Conduit, wiring, and connections to time, temperature, flow, pressure, and other controls remote from the "package unit" or "package system".

c. A "package unit" is defined as a heating, ventilating, cooling, pumping, or other unit that is self-contained except for remote controls, and all other units or systems that are indicated to be "package units".

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General: Only written approval of Architect will permit substitutions for materials specified; See Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions for procedure.


A. Standards:

1. Comply with standards listed in the following:

a. Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL).

b. The USA National Electric Code (NEC), 1991 edition, and all [California State Amendments] local amendments there-to.

c. The USA National Fire Code (NFPA).

d. The National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

e. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).



f. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

g. California Code Of Regulations, Titles 8, 19 and 24, Part 3.

2. Off-Site Work: Conform to Governing Agencies requirements.

3. Earthquake Provisions: Comply with California Code Of Regulations, Title 24, Table 23P.

4. In case of conflict among the reference standards, the more stringent provisions shall govern and shall be resolved before installation at Contractor's expense. Prepare and secure approval for any clarifying details required by inspection authorities.

5. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as authority to permit work not conforming to codes, ordinances, standards or regulations.

B. Qualification Of Installers:

1. Throughout the progress of installation of the work of each Section, provide where required as indicated in respective Sections, at least one manufacturer's authorized representative who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, who shall be present at the job site and shall direct all work performed under that particular Section

2. Cutting and patching finish work shall be performed by workmen of the proper trade.

C. Qualification Of Manufacturers:

1. Manufacturers of the products supplied for this project shall have been in the business of manufacturing the particular product for at least five years and be able to prove a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. As a condition for approval and when directed by the Architect, submit a list of past projects showing a minimum of five projects of similar scope to the Architect for approval.

2. Provide together with the Shop Drawing submittal, where called for in these Specifications, a list of five projects which shall have been in satisfactory operation for the past five years.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300.

B. Samples: Follow procedure under General Conditions. Submit duplicate samples showing manufacturers' standard finishes, colors and textures for all equipment exposed to view.

C. Manufacturers Data: Within 30 calendar days after award of Contract, submit:

1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed.

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.

3. Unless specifically called for otherwise, provide bound copies of catalog cuts for standard products, not requiring specifically prepared Shop Drawings, for the following:

a. Wire and cable.

b. Conduit and raceways.

c. Outlet boxes.

d. Convenience outlets.



e. Switches for lighting control.

f. Disconnect switches for power control.

g. Circuit breakers.

h. Face plates for convenience outlets and light switches.

4. Where more than one item, size, rating or other variations appear on a catalog cut sheet, clearly identify all items to be provided properly indexed and referenced to Architect's identification numbers, designations and/or details.

5. Provide specially prepared Shop Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to:

a. Fire alarm system and wiring diagrams.

b. Grounding system.

6. Anchor bolt layouts for all equipment installed including setting instructions and exposed lengths of bolts and elevations of top of foundations

7. No work shall be initiated or fabrication of any equipment started prior to Architect's return of reviewed submittals.

D. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Thoroughly instruct operating personnel designated by the District in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed.

2. Following approval of Shop Drawings of electrical equipment and prior to acceptance of electrical work, prepare two (2) copies of operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01700, describing operating, servicing, and maintenance requirements of electrical equipment installed under Division 16 with particular emphasis on safety devices. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall cover all electrical equipment and systems including but not limited to the following:

a. Fire alarm and Detection system.

b. Circuit breakers

E. Information contained in the manual for the above equipment shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and printed descriptive bulletins.

2. Manufacturer's installation, operating, and maintenance instruction booklets.

3. Parts list and costs.

4. List of recommended spare parts for 12 months' operation.

5. Name, address, and phone number for closet source of spare parts.

6. Wiring and schematic diagrams.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection: Protect materials before, during, and after installation and protect installed work and materials of all other trades.



B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Inspector and/or Architect and at no additional cost to the District.

C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all materials to the job site in their original unopened containers, where applicable, with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Inspector.

1.07 PERMITS

A. General: Secure permits and pay all required fees for the installation of the electrical work.

1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. General: Refer to Specification Section 01720, Contract Close-Out, "Project Record Documents", for requirements.

1.09 CERTIFICATES

A. General: Refer to Specification Section 01700, Contract Close-Out, for requirements.

1.10 GUARANTEE

A. General: Refer to Specification Section 01700, Contract Close-Out, "Guarantee for Requirements."

B. Manufacturers Guaranties: Submit guarantees for all applicable equipment and devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. General: See General Conditions, Article titled "Materials".

1. Architect shall be the sole judge of material conformance to Contract Documents. Equal products shall be as selected by the Architect.

2. All materials and products shall be new and in perfect condition, and of the manufacturer's latest type and model. Unless otherwise noted, each material or product type shall be from one manufacturer only.

3. All exterior mounted electrical boxes, devices and miscellaneous items shall be tamperproof assemblies. Where not a standard feature, shop modify assembly to meet this requirement.

4. Where any devices or equipment is referred to or indicated in these documents or on the Drawings in the singular number, such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the intended installation as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings.

5. In case of conflicts among Drawings and Specifications, the more stringent requirement, larger quantities, better qualities and/or more proper application and installation for the particular situation shall govern.

6. Wherever "finishes" are indicated to be selected by the Architect, such "finishes" shall include all standard as well as optional finishes offered by the Manufacturers.

7. All materials shall be U.L. listed where applicable.



B. Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers:

1. Where manufacturer and catalog numbers are indicated, the published data on the product by the manufacturer are deemed to be part of this specification.

2. Numbers used indicate basic minimum design and appearance required, and must be modified to meet all specific requirements of Contract Documents.

3. Where new equipment is intended to work with existing equipment or to be a part of existing equipment such as new circuit breakers or motor starters to be added to existing switchgear, the new equipment must match those existing in all respects. If this is not possible, then new equipment must be compatible with existing equipment. Contractor shall verify in field this requirement prior to submitting Bid.

4. Before submitting bid, verify availability of such modification. Where manufacturers cannot meet these modifications, notify Architect 10 days prior to bid date and deem these products removed from approved list of equipment.

5. Act of submitting bid is certification that all equipment specified, with required modifications, is available from at least one manufacturer listed.

2.02 FLUSH FLOOR COUPLINGS (not required for this project)

A. Not Required on this project.

2.03 OUTLET BOXES

A. General:

1. Provide all boxes necessary for proper installation of electrical work in compliance with applicable codes and regulations whether required box is specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or not.

2. Boxes shall be 1-piece galvanized pressed steel knockout type, minimum size 4" (10 cm) square by 1-1/2" (38 mm), in all wall and ceiling locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. Cast boxes shall be ferrous or aluminum with threaded-hubs and dipped in rust inhibitor.

2.04 PULL BOXES

A. General:

1. Where pull boxes are indicated as required in wall, ceiling and in dry locations, provide boxes constructed of code-gauge sheet steel finished with one coat of metal primer and one coat of primer sealer.

2. All pull boxes in wall or in ceiling shall be recessed or concealed unless otherwise noted.

3. Provide pull boxes with screw-on type covers. Provide a minimum 1" (2.64 cm) all around flange for recess mounted type.

B. Where located outdoors, in wet locations or indicated as weatherproof, provide pull boxes constructed in code-gauge steel, hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication and finish with one coat of metal primer and sealer. Install cover with stainless steel tamper-proof captive screws and neoprene gaskets. Seal around conduit entries with silicone sealant.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. General:

1. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with approved recommendations of the manufacturer and conforming to the Contract Documents. All devices and equipment are laid out per requirements of one manufacturer. Modify work and arrangements to suit actual equipment installed and pay for all addition-al cost incurred, if any. The installation shall conform to the applicable codes, rules, and regulations. The Drawings indicate, in diagrammatic form, the work to be done rather than exact routing, location and arrangement of equipment, conduit, and wiring. Make use of data in Contract Documents, verify against developed field conditions, install work in an orderly arrangement in a manner to overcome structural and other interference.

2. Study all Drawings and properly locate the outlets and equipment so that they are readily accessible. Locate equipment and outlets to avoid interference with mechanical or structural features. Do not support any electrical material, equipment or device from sheet metal roof decks or ductworks. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the Drawings, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable for written approval.

3. Where developed conditions make revisions necessary to indicated locations and arrangements, Contractor shall make changes, at no additional cost, provided:

a. Change is ordered prior to time conduit is in-stalled.

b. Length of conduit run is not changed more than 10-percent.

4. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over electrical drawings in representation of general construction work, and drawings of various trades take precedence in representation of work of these trades. Refer to all Contract Documents and coordinate electrical work with other work.

5. Where discrepancies arise among the various Contract Documents, stop work in affected areas. Promptly notify Inspector of conditions.

6. Galvanic and chemical corrosion shall be prevented by isolating dissimilar metals and preventing contact of aluminum with concrete, plaster, mortar or earth.

7. All equipment shall be braced and/or anchored to resist a horizontal force per Table 23P, Title 24, California Code Of Regulations.

3.02 BOXES AND SUPPORTS

A. General:

1. Provide boxes in the wiring or raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections or splices and mounting of devices or fixtures.

2. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be the cast metal hub type where required by applicable codes, when located in normally wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, in hazardous areas, and when in-stalled exposed up to 84" (2.133 m) above interior finished floors, grades or walkways. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel. Cast conduit fittings may be used instead of boxes except where boxes contain devices. Cast metal boxes used in hazardous areas shall be rated properly for the classification of the areas.



3. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be not less than 4" (10 cm) except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configuration, as approved by the Architect.

4. Aluminum boxes in contact with concrete, mortar, or plaster shall have a bituminous or other acceptable coating or bituminous-impregnated felt plastic sheet, or other acceptable material between the aluminum and the alkaline material.

5. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension or plaster rings, as required. Boxes for use in concrete or tile shall be standard boxes having square corner tile-type covers with ribs or extensions for casting in concrete. Cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior surfaces shall be gasketed.

6. Boxes and supports shall be fastened with bolts to steel structural shapes, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or concrete unit masonry and machine screws to metal studs and furring. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts, or nail-type nylon anchors, may be used in lieu of expansion shields or machine screws. Penetration into rein-forced concrete shall avoid cutting any main reinforcing steel. Reinforcing steel location and depth shall be determined prior to making any penetration.

7. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with galvanized steel box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or attach directly to support structural members. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable.

8. Provide covers of the types most suitable for the fixtures or devices used at the outlets. In outlets supporting lighting fixtures, provide 3/8" (9.5 mm) adjustable fixture studs.

9. Use extension rings with blank covers for making exposed conduit connections from flush wall or ceiling outlet boxes.

10. Use outlet boxes serving fixtures or devices as pull boxes wherever practicable. In finished areas, provide the specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated or directed by the Architect.

11. Take particular care in locating outlet boxes in acoustic tile, masonry, paneling or other modular type finishes. Where Architect's documents do not dictate location or control, consult with the trades concerned so that outlets may be symmetrically placed in the finished module. Locate fixture outlets in acoustic tile either in the center of a tile, at the center of the intersection of 2 tiles or at the point of intersection of 4 tiles.

B. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be not less than 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture and signal systems outlets shall not be less than 4" (100 mm) square except that 4" (100 mm) x 2" (50 mm) boxes may be used where only one raceway enters the outlet.

C. Boxes For Signal Systems: Boxes for Telephone, Intercom, Fire Alarm, Security & Wired-clock systems shall be minimum of 4-11/16" (120 mm) square by 2-1/8" (54 mm) with plaster ring where required unless device has a manufacturer’s recommendation for a different size.

D. Clock outlet: Clock outlet for use in other than a wired clock system, shall consist of an outlet box, a plaster ring where required, and a single receptacle with clock outlet plate. The receptacle shall be recessed sufficiently within the box to allow the complete insertion of a standard connector plug. Provide cap flush with the plate. A suitable clip or support for hanging the clock shall be part, and at the top, of the plate. Material and finish of the plate shall be as specified hereinbefore.



E. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

F. Wall Outlet Locations: The locations of wall outlets shall be measured from the finished floor to the center of the outlet or switch box. The edges of outlet and switch boxes for concealed work shall be not more than 1/4" (6 mm) from the plane of the finished wall surface, except that boxes having flush plates shall not project beyond finished walls. Unless indicated otherwise, the location of outlets shall be as follows: CM | INCHES |

1. Duplex receptacle. 45 18

2. Switch (toggle) for lighting control 122 48

3. Receptacle over counter or bench 117 46

4. Receptacles and plug mold over desk 107 42

5. Clock outlets. 214 84

6. Telephone outlet. 45 18

G. Other Boxes: Use solid-type ganged boxes where required for more than two devices or for barriered outlets. Use concrete boxes for outlets in concrete construction.

H. Recess Mounting: All wall outlet boxes shall be recess mounted in areas with finished walls, unless otherwise shown or required to be surface mounted when approved by the Architect.

3.03 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Refer to other Sections and Divisions of the Specification for equipment requiring connections. In general, unless otherwise noted, all power consuming equipment and appliances including controls specified in the Specification or indicated on Drawings and those furnished by the District shall be connected and made operational under this Section of the work.

B. Shop Drawing: Confirm with equipment supplier and/or respective shop drawings to verify specific connection method, location and requirement and provide the necessary connection accessories whether indicated on the Drawings or not.

C. Flexible connections of short length shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration or movement and for all motors. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections.

3.04 PENETRATIONS

A. General: Penetrations in walls, floors or ceilings requiring protected openings shall be fire-stopped. Fire-stopping shall be of an approved material, securely installed and capable of maintaining its integrity when subjected to the time-temperature curve of State Fire Marshal Standard 12-43-3 and Standard 12-43-1. Manufacturer's instructions shall be made available to the inspection authority and kept at the job site.

3.05 MEMBRANE PENETRATION

A. General: Where penetration through membrane cannot be avoided, cut and re-seal membrane at point of penetration as required.



3.06 PAINTING AND FINISHING.

A. General: Paint all electrical equipment exposed to view in public areas with one coat of primer and two coats finish paint. For equipment inside electrical room, mechanical room and utility closets accessible only to authorized maintenance personnel, standard manufacturer's finishes are acceptable.

3.07 TESTS

A. General: In addition to tests required by other sections, perform or cause to be performed in the presence of the Architect, all tests specified for electrical work when the work is substantially complete.

B. Ground Resistance Test:

1. Employ a firm, qualified in such work, to measure resistance to grounding electrodes. Firm shall be approved by the Architect. Make tests before concrete is placed in affected areas in order that corrective measures, if required, may be taken.

2. Test to demonstrate that the insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground to be not less than requirements of Title 24. All circuits shall be tested for proper neutral connections.

3. Test to demonstrate that the entire raceway, boxes and metallic enclosure system maintain electrical continuity and that the maximum resistance measured from any point on the system to a grounded point of reference does not exceed 5 ohms.

4. Submit to the Architect, a report showing the results of these measurements.

5. If the resistances do not comply with the requirements of these Specifications, perform all corrective measures as directed by the Architect.

C. Service Voltage Test:

1. Measure the service voltages under no load and under maximum load conditions.

2. Submit to the Architect, a report showing the results of these measurements.

3. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the voltages regulation are not within acceptable limits make and complete all arrangements with the utility company and/or other concerned agencies for proper electrical service.

D. Operating Test: Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test and submit for approval at such time as the Architect directs. Conduct the test in the presence of the Architect and the Inspector. Demonstrate all systems and equipment to:

1. Operate in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Be free from all electrical and mechanic-al defects.

E. Other Tests: Conduct all other and additional tests to assure the Architect that the electrical work is free from short circuits, grounds other than intentional grounds, and defective or damaged insulation. In additional, perform all tests that are required by authorities having jurisdiction or are requested by the Architect.

F. Cost: All cost incurred, including required instruments and personnel for the tests shall be included on the bid price and paid for by the Contractor.



3.08 REPAIR OF EXISTING WORK

A. General: The work shall be laid out in advance, and where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of the conduit, raceways or other electrical work, this work shall be carefully done and any damage to building, piping or equipment shall, following review of damage, be repaired by craftsmen, skilled in the trades involved, at no additional cost to the District.

3.09 CLEANING

A. General: Periodically remove waste and rubbish and maintain order. Clean and polish finished metal surfaces. Exposed materials, equipment and apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, rust, cement, plaster, etc., and have all cracks and corners scraped out clean, and all surfaces carefully cleaned of grease and oil spots and be left smooth and clean, with all unfinished surfaces ready for painting. Clean all grease, oil and other foreign substances from floors, walls, ceilings and fixtures, and leave premises clean and free from all debris and unused construction materials, where caused by work under this Section. Completely clean insides of all lighting fixtures removing all dirt, bugs and other foreign substances.

3.10 COORDINATION

A. General: Coordinate with all other trades involved in the construction project. All work shall be fully laid out in advance, coordinating all features of construction, including control wiring between different systems.

3.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Establish and maintain quality control for operations under this Section to ensure compliance with Contract requirements, and maintain records of quality control for all materials, equipment and construction operations.

3.12 INSPECTION

A. Preparatory inspection shall be conducted prior to commencing work, as follows:

1. Check to see that all required Drawings and other submittals have been made, are complete, and approved. Where exceptions have been taken to submittals, but approved subject to correction, check to verify that proper corrections have been made.

2. Check materials and equipment upon delivery at job site for compliance with approved submittal. Verify for proper storage.

3. Check layout drawings and details of interfaces with existing work, with interfaces and interrelations with work under other Divisions of the Specifications, and with interfaces with work performed.

4. Check the actual conditions on the site for conformance with the above. Verify that conditions are ready for new work.

5. Review installation procedures and code requirements with each person involved in inspecting and performing the work.

6. Review requirements of Drawings, Specifications, and the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. In the event clarification or the Architect’s decisions are required, such shall be obtained before proceeding with the work.

7. Quiz personnel doing work to ensure their under-standing of Contract requirements including workmanship and techniques.



8. This inspection and the results thereof shall be recorded. Inspection records shall be made available for review by the Architect and the Inspector at any time upon request.

B. Initial inspection shall be conducted when a representative sample of the work is complete, as follows:

1. Review the representative sample of the work against the Specification and code requirements previously discussed at preparatory inspection. Review shall include, but is not to be limited to:

a. Layout and sub-grade work.

b. Wireway installation.

c. Cable installation.

d. Equipment installation.

e. Terminations and splices.

f. Grounding.

g. Man holes, hand holes, junction boxes, enclosures, etc.

2. Note and discuss all deficiencies observed and corrective action to be taken. If corrective action is to be taken, an additional inspection shall be conducted for compliance.

3. This inspection and the results thereof shall be recorded. Inspection records shall be made available for review by the Architect or the Inspector at any time upon request.

C. Follow-up inspections shall be conducted daily to ensure compliance with corrections required by initial inspection, as follows:

1. Check completed work against corrected representative sample of work.

2. Perform all tests required by Contract to ensure compliance.

3. This inspection and the results thereof shall be recorded. Inspection records shall be made available for review by the Architect or the District Inspector at any time upon request.

D. The three-phase inspection method outlined above shall be applied to each item of work. This inspection method and the records thereof are in addition to and part of the inspection and testing requirements specified in each of the Sections.

E. Copies: Furnish the Architect a copy of these records and tests, as well as records of corrective action taken.

END OF SECTION


CONDUITS 16111 - 1

SECTION 16111 CONDUITS PART 1 - GENERAL

A. The general provisions of Section 1000 apply to this section. 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Conduits; including:

1. Rigid steel conduit.

2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

4. Rigid aluminum conduit.

5. Polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC).

6. Flexible metal conduit.

7. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 1.02 DEFINITION

A. Conduit: This term shall be construed to mean conduit and conduit fittings; and tubing and tubing fittings.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Support material: Section 16190. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION - ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED IN THE USA.

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized including the threads, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.1 and UL6.

1. Threaded, hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized fittings manufactured in

accordance with ANSI C80.4.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized including the threads, manufactured in accordance with UL 1242.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

1. Provide compression fittings in walls, ceiling spaces or exposed construction areas.


CONDUITS 16111 - 2

2. Provide compression (water tight) fittings in damp areas or areas exposed to weather.

D. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5.

1. Threaded fittings, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.4.

E. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Schedule 40 and schedule 80, manufactured in accordance

with ANSI C33.91, UL 651, and Nema TC-2.

1. Cemented type fittings of the same manufacturer as the conduit.

F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type EB, heavy wall, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C33.91, UL651, and Nema TC-8.

1. Cemented fittings of the same manufacturer as the conduit.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, manufacturer in accordance with UL 1.

1. Squeeze type, malleable iron, cadmium plated, straight and angle connectors for all

sizes and twist-in connectors for 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch flexible metal conduit.

H. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized with liquid-tight vinyl jacket.

1. Liquid-tight fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 USE

A. EMT for all exposed and concealed work except as indicated in Paragraphs B, C, D, E, F, and G.

B. Rigid steel, IMC, or rigid aluminum conduit in areas where exposed conduit could be subject

to physical damage or where conduit is exposed and conductor phase to ground voltage exceeds 300 volts.

C. Rigid aluminum conduit may be used for all feeder runs exposed or concealed in stud walls

and spaces above suspended ceilings.

D. PVC Conduit:

1. Schedule 40 for runs below grade in direct contact with earth.

2. Schedule 40 in concrete floors, walls or roofs.

E. Flexible Conduit (steel only permitted):

1. For connection to equipment subject to vibration, maximum length 18 inches. In wet locations use liquid-tight flexible conduit.

2. For connection to lighting fixtures above suspended ceilings. Lengths limited to 72

inches.


CONDUITS 16111 - 3

3. Install ground conductors in all flexible conduits.

F. Where 3/4-inch conduit runs are concealed in walls or ceilings and these runs are through

wood studs and wood joists, flexible steel conduit may be used up to a maximum length of 6'0".

G. All risers shall be PVC coated RGS with bushings.

H. In concrete or below grade use conduit not smaller than 1 inch. Maximum size in concrete

slab: 1 inch. Run larger sizes under slab.

I. Use long sweep elbows with minimum radius 10 times nominal conduit diameter for all telephone and communication runs.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide conduit support and bracing in accordance with the latest published SMACNA guidelines.

B. Perform excavating, trenching, backfilling, and compacting as specified in Division 2.

C. Minimum cover for runs below finished grade outside buildings: 24 inches except where

noted or required by the serving utility. Minimum cover for conduit in concrete floors, walls or roof: 1/3 thickness of slab. Minimum cover under building slabs is 12-inches.

D. Minimum separation from uninsulated hot water pipes, steam pipes, heater flues or vents: 6

inches. Avoid running conduit directly under water lines.

E. Protect inside of conduit from dirt and rubbish during construction by capping all openings with plastic caps intended for the purpose.

F. Provide conduit bodies for exposed conduit runs at junctions, bends or offsets where

required. Do not use elbows or bends around outside corners of beams, walls or equipment. Make conduit body covers accessible.

G. Make conduit field cuts square with saw and ream out to full size. Shoulder conduits in

couplings.

H. Run a minimum of one 3/4-inch empty conduit for every three single pole spare circuit breakers, spaces or fraction thereof and not less than two 3/4-inch conduits from every flush mounted panel to an accessible space above the ceiling and below the floor.

I. Make conduit projections from covered areas to areas exposed to the weather watertight by

proper flashing. Extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches in all directions from conduit.

J. Where conduit is to remain empty, install polypropylene or nylon pull-line 3/16" minimum diameter from end to end with tag at each end designating opposite terminations.

K. Run conduit parallel and at right angle to building lines, when visible in finished

construction.

L. Cap conduits indicated to be stubbed-out underground using glued-on PVC caps intended for this purpose.


CONDUITS 16111 - 4

M. Install a coupling flush with the floor on all conduits stubbed up through floors on grade.

N. Make no bends with a radius less than 12 times the diameter of the cable it contains nor

more than 90 degrees. Make field bends with tools designed for conduit bending. Heating of metallic conduit to facilitate bending is not permitted.

O. Where conduit installed in concrete or masonry extends across building construction joints,

provide expansion fittings as manufactured by O.Z.; Crouse-Hinds; Appleton; or equal, with approved ground straps and clamps.

P. Concrete Wall or Slab Penetrations: All core drilling, sleeves, blockouts or other

penetrations must be approved by the Structural Engineer prior to installation.

1. Space sleeves and core drills to insure a minimum dimension of 3 times the nominal trade diameter of the largest adjacent conduit between sleeves or core drills.

2. Use blockouts for concentrations of conduits in a confined area.

Q. Do not penetrate walls with flexible conduit where subject to physical damage. Use

recessed box with extension ring for transition from interior to exterior of wall.

R. All homeruns shown shall be run to the panel indicated independently of all other homeruns. Provide pull points so as not to exceed total bends of 360 degrees between them unless otherwise indicated.

S. At switchboards, manholes and floor standing distribution panelboards, provide insulated

throat bushings or bell ends on all non-metallic conduit entries and bushings on all metallic conduit entries.

T. Provide bushings on all conduit terminations sized 1" and larger.

U. Provide weatherproof boxes and connectors for all exposed parking structure raceways and

boxes. V. Provide bell ends on all conduits into pullboxes and manholes, seal all conduits after

conductors are pulled.

W. Cap all unused conduits with end cap. Do not tape.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTING FIXTURES 16510 - 1

SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Lighting fixtures, including lamps, accessories and support materials. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Submittals: Section 16010.

B. Outlet and Junction Boxes: Section 16130.

C. Supporting Devices: Section 16190.

D. Contactors, Relays, Time Switches, Photocontrols, etc.: Section 16901. 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION

A. Fixtures schedule lists one or more acceptable manufacturers for each fixture type.

B. Provide all lighting fixtures of each type from the same manufacturer.

C. Provide sockets for screw base lamps of plated steel, brass or bronze.

D. Lamps - Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. General Electric.

2. Phillips.

3. Sylvania.

4. As indicated for specialty lamps.

E. Flexible metal conduit systems connecting individual tandem wired lighting fixtures.

1. Conductors carrying line voltage and current shall be sized in accordance with the overcurrent device protecting the circuit indicated.

2. Provide a #12 AWG minimum size ground conductor.

F. Provide electronic ballasts for all fluorescent and HID fixtures.

3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION



A. Provide a lighting fixture for each lighting outlet indicated.

B. Provide recessed and semi-recessed fixtures with mounting frames compatible with the ceiling and wall systems employed and secure fixture mechanically to frame.

C. Align rows of suspended and surface mounted fluorescent fixtures to form straight lines at

uniform elevations.

D. Provide swivel ball-type hangers which will allow a minimum of 45 degrees angle for fixtures indicated as pendant mounted.

E. Make recessed fixture fit snugly against ceiling to prevent light leakage.

F. Support suspended and surface mounted fluorescent fixtures as follows:

1. Fixtures not over 12 inches wide and not over 50 inches long, a minimum of two

fastenings.

2. Fixtures not over 12 inches wide and over 50 inches long, a minimum of three fastenings.

3. Fixtures over 12 inches wide and not over 50 inches long, a minimum of four

fastenings.

G. Support pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures as follows:

1. Single fixtures not over 12 inches wide, a minimum of two single pendants.

2. Single fixtures over 12 inches wide, a minimum of two single pendants at each end or one double pendant at each end.

3. Continuous rows of fixtures not over 12 inches wide, a minimum of one single

pendant for each fixture plus one for each row.

4. Continuous rows of fixtures over 12 inches wide, a minimum of two single pendants or one double pendant for each fixture plus one for each row.

5. Locate pendants for continuous row fixtures at each joint and each end of row.

6. Rigidly fasten continuous row fixtures together with fixtures manufacturer supplied

joiner.

H. Provide each lighting fixture with the lamps indicated on the fixture schedule.

1. Provide self-extinguishing lamps in open-bottom or unshielded metal halide fixtures.

I. Clean and relamp existing fixtures to be reused.

J. EMT shall not be used to support suspended fixtures of any type. Suspension shall be by means of standard hangers, where available and applicable, by rigid threaded conduit and fittings, or by rods.

K. Where fixtures are to be mounted on, or suspended from concrete ceiling, provide

cast-in-place inserts.



L. Fixtures shall not be supported by outlet box cover screws alone; provide a fixture stud or

“hickey” for added support.

M. Provide a junction box at each exit light fixture indicated.

N. Provide weatherproof boxes and connectors and liquid tight flexible conduit to each light fixture.

O. All suspended fixtures will be installed with 1/8-inch safety cable and four Crosby clamps

(two top and two bottom) to be used as a fixture support backup. END OF SECTION


FIRE ALARM 16715-1

SECTION 16715

FIRE ALARM


A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including Division 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Labor, equipment, materials, connections, testing, and performance of operations in the installation of fire alarm system.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. See Drawings for Codes applicable to the installation of the work.

1.04 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire detection system shall continually supervise and monitor the following initiating, signaling, and monitoring circuits:

1. Manual fire-pull stations.

2. Smoke and heat detectors, and duct detectors, including those installed under other sections.

3. Fire sprinkler flow and tamper switches. In existing installations also include PIV tamper switches.

4. Alarm signaling circuits including alarm horns and visual alarm units.

5. Annunciators.

6. Power supplies and batteries.

B. System controls shall be UL listed for power limited applications in accordance with National Electrical Code.

C. The fire alarm devices and equipment shall be listed for installation for the fire alarm control panel to which they are being connected.

D. Complete installation shall conform to the current version of NFPA 72.

E. System labels and devices programming addresses shall be based on the existing system used at this school.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide a complete fire alarm system component submittal Include the following information and details as applicable:

1. Installer name, address, telephone number.


FIRE ALARM 16715-2

2. List of system components, equipment and devices, including manufacturer model numbers, quantity and mounting heights, and symbols.

3. Copies of manufacturer specification sheets for equipment and devices indicated. Highlight or identify the specific components on Catalog cut sheets.

B. Prior to Substantial Completion submit to the Architect or Engineer of Record and to Owner Authorized Representative a complete updated set of the Shop Drawings showing changes made to the Fire Alarm System during construction. These drawings will become the System As-Built Drawing set for the Fire Alarm System Owner’s Manual.

1.06 CERTIFICATION

A. Certification: Installation of fire alarm system shall not begin until Shop Drawings, including State Fire Marshal listing numbers of fire alarm components, are submitted and reviewed by the Architect. Written certification by fire alarm equipment distributor or manufacturer shall be submitted to the Architect stating that system and its component parts are as approved and listed by the State Fire Marshal, and that the design conforms to requirements set forth in CBC.

B. System shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of memory ICs.

1.08 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION

A. When a fire alarm condition is detected by one of the system alarm initiating devices, the following functions shall occur:

1. System alarm LED shall flash.

2. Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.

3. The LCD display shall indicate type of device, custom label location label and point status alarm condition.

4. Appropriate change of status message shall be transmitted to remote annunciator(s).

5. Automatic programs assigned to alarm point shall be executed and associated indicating devices and relays activated.

6. In the event of a fire alarm control panel activation, manual and automatic electronic tone or electromechanical bell class passing signals shall be disabled.

7. In the event of a fire alarm condition the Central and Autonomous Public-Address System shall be overridden.

8. DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter) shall activate.

B. Trouble and Supervisory Conditions.

1. When any trouble condition is detected the following functions shall occur:


FIRE ALARM 16715-3

a. System trouble LED shall flash.

b. Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.

c. The LCD display shall indicate the type of trouble and custom label location associated with the trouble condition and its location. Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages. If such an alarm is displayed, then trouble messages shall not be displayed.

d. Appropriate message shall be transmitted to remote annunciators.

e. DACT shall activate.

C. When any supervisory condition occurs such as a sprinkler valve tamper, the following function shall occur:

1. System supervisory LED shall flash.

2. Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.

3. Appropriate message shall be transmitted to remote annunciators.

4. DACT shall activate.

D. Activation of control panel ACKNOWLEDGE switch in response to a single new alarm, trouble or supervisory condition shall silence panel sounding device and change system alarm, trouble, or supervisory LED from flashing to steady-ON. If additional new alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions exist in the system; activation of this switch shall advance display to next alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition that exists, and shall not silence local audible device or change LED to steady until new conditions have been so acknowledged. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence of a new alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition shall cause panel to resound, and sequences as described above, shall repeat.

E. Activation of the signal silence switch shall cause appropriate notification (indicating) appliances and relays to return to normal condition. Selection of notification appliance circuits and relays silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable.

F. Activation of system reset switch shall cause electronically latched initiating devices or zones, as well as associated output devices and circuits, to return to normal condition after sixty seconds of alarm. If alarm conditions exist in system after system reset switch activation, system shall then re-sound alarm conditions as indicated hereafter.

G. Activation of lamp test switch shall turn on LED indicators, LCD display, and local sounding device in panel, and then return to previous condition.

H. Fire alarm indicating appliances may be silenced or extinguished, after one minute, by operating signal silence switch at the FACP or by use of key supervised alarm silence switch at remote annunciators. A subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate signals. Audible indicating appliances shall be automatically silenced after no less than five nor more than ten minutes of operation. Visual indicating appliances shall be extinguished at system reset, or automatically after no less than five nor more than ten minutes of operation. Fire sprinkler flow alarm bells shall not silence until the contacts in the fire sprinkler flow switch return to the normal non-alarm state. Appropriate signage must be installed on or next to the sprinkler alarm bell.


FIRE ALARM 16715-4

I. Notification appliance circuits shall be silenceable for testing purposes by authorized persons. Protected pass-codes, keys, or another secure method that does not require entering into the system programming shall be used.

1.08 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. The fire alarm control panel and remote power supply shall receive 120 VAC power, 60 Hz, through a dedicated 20 amps circuit. Circuit breaker protection for the dedicated fire alarm power circuits shall be equipped with a handle lock-on device; the breaker handle shall be colored red and labeled “FIRE ALARM”. Clearly label the Electrical panel name, location and circuit number on the inside of the fire alarm control panel and remote power supplies using a p-touch style labeling system. Transient voltage surge suppression shall be provided at the 120VAC input terminal.

B. System shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power, in a normal quiescent mode, for a period of 24 hours with 15 minutes of alarm indication at end of this period. System shall automatically transfer to standby batteries upon power failure. Battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. Batteries, once discharged, shall recharge at a rate to provide a minimum of 70 percent capacity in 12 hours.

C. Circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually protected at control panel.


A. Installer shall have successfully completed at least five projects of equal scope in the past five years, and have been in business of furnishing and installing fire alarm systems of this type for at least five years.

B. Installer shall be a factory authorized installer and service provider for the brand of equipment offered and shall provide documentation to the Architect upon request.

C. Installer shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to the equipment and shall maintain a spare set of major parts for the system at all times.

D. Certifications: Installer shall be able submit certification from the equipment manufacturer indicating that installer is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer and is trained on network applications.

E. Materials and equipment installed shall be new.

F. Equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Installer of the equipment. Furnish a letter from the manufacturer of major equipment, which certifies that the installer is an authorized distributor and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices.

G. System startup and testing shall be performed per the SFM requirements and in accordance with NFPA 72.

H. Provide at the time of Owner Acceptance of the installation, equipment, and updated software, if required, which is to include the appropriate operating system, pass-codes, electronic keys and program disks, manuals and cables employed in the installation of the system. These components shall be delivered to the OAR.


FIRE ALARM 16715-5

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The Fire Alarm Equipment Manufacturer shall provide a warranty in accordance with SFM requirements.

B. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a trained authorized representative of the manufacturer for a period of five years after expiration of the warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire alarm equipment shall be standard products as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Catalog and model numbers listed are intended to establish type and quality of equipment and system design as well as operating features required.

2.2 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Monitor Modules:

1. Monitor module shall be addressable monitor module type as indicated on the drawings. Modules shall connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices, N.O. dry contact devices, including four-wire smoke detectors, to one of SLC loops. Monitor module shall install in a four-inch square by 2 1/8-inch deep electrical box. The module shall have its loop number, electronic address, and function label on the front cover using a labeling system.

2. Monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches or binary dip switches and shall store it's device address internally. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions indicating that monitor module is operational and in regular communication with control panel.

B. The cable types shall be as indicated on the Drawings and conform to SFM standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Fire alarm system shall not be used for any purpose other than fire alarm functions.

3.02 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install required conductors to devices indicated on Drawings. Provide required conductor terminations to devices for a complete system to function as specified and indicated on Drawings.

B. Splices are not allowed in junction boxes. Terminations shall be in terminal cabinets or on equipment terminals.


FIRE ALARM 16715-6

C. Conductors shall be installed within conduits, boxes, and terminal cabinets in a totally enclosed installation. Furnish and install conductors required to connect incoming and outgoing circuits, including spare conductors, to terminal strips within terminal cabinets.

D. Wiring within equipment and terminal cabinets shall be installed to conform to contract documentation and NFPA 72 standards, and shall be terminated on terminal blocks having terminals for required connections. Wiring shall be cabled, laced, and securely fastened in place so that no weight is imposed on equipment or terminals.

E. Conductors shall be color-coded per existing coding conventions with code markers at terminal cabinets, and equipment.

F. Wiring within equipment and terminal cabinets shall be carefully strapped, and shall be formed in rectangular configuration.

G. Complete installation shall comply with local building codes and applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code, and the NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

H. Location of outlet boxes and equipment on Drawings is approximate, unless dimensions are indicated. Do not scale Drawings to determine locations and routing of conduits and outlet boxes. Location of outlet boxes and equipment shall conform to architectural features of the building and other Work already in place, and must be ascertained in the field before the start of Work.

I. Drawings generally indicate Work to be provided, but do not indicate all bends, transitions or special fittings required to clear beams, girders or other Work already in place. Investigate conditions where conduits are to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.

3.03 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. Programming shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements to assign address to new devices.

B. Device Descriptors:

1. Descriptors shall enable responding personnel to identify the location of a fire quickly and accurately, and shall indicate the status of emergency equipment or fire safety functions that might affect the safety of occupants. The minimum required information for devices intended to report smoke, fire, or fire sprinklers water flow include, but may not be limited to: Building, floor (if multiple floors exist in the building), room or space description, and device type and digital address (Smoke detector, Heat detector, Fire sprinkler water flow switch, etc).

a. Building: The building must always be included in the descriptor, even if there is only one building one the site.

b. Floor: In multi-floor buildings the floor designation (1st, 2nd, etc) must be included in the descriptor.

c. Room Description: The room or space description must be unique. Using the same designation for multiple spaces, such as “Workroom”, “Counselor’s Office”, or “Men’s restroom”, etc. is not acceptable. If, during a project, the room numbers or the use of the room changes then the room or space descriptor must be changed to agree with the change.


FIRE ALARM 16715-7

Proper signage should be provided for each space to aid fire department personnel in the identification of the room or space.

d. Device Type, Address and Compass Designations: The device type and digital address must be included with the descriptor, such as smoke detector or heat detector, etc. Some systems provide this information automatically in the descriptor. Compass designations, (N, S, E, and W) are required in spaces such as corridors where there are multiple detectors and this information would be helpful to responding fire department personnel in locating the device reporting alarm. It is not necessary to include compass designations in smaller spaces where there are multiple detectors located in close proximity to each other.

C. ACCEPTABLE ABBREVIATIONS

Rm.- Room Bldg.- Building Smk. - Smoke

Corr.- Corridor Lby- Lobby Asst. - Assistant

Eng.- English N – North Nrs. - Nurse

Flr.- Floor S – South Cnclr - Counselor

Ht.- Heat E – East Off. - Office

Lib.- Library W – West PE – Physical Education

Lkr. – Locker Kit- Kitchen RR- Rest Room

Stu Str – Student Store Sci - Science By = near

Stor Rm – Store Room Café - Cafeteria PM – Plant Manager

1st- First 2nd- Second 3rd- Third

Hopr Rm – Hopper Room Det - Detector Elev - Elevator

Prin – Principal Blr Rm – Boiler Room Conf – Conference

Park – Parking Bsmt –Basement MPR.- Multi-Purpose room

3.04 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Unless otherwise specified, but not limited to actuation of manual stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, linear heat or smoke detectors, or water-flow switches shall cause the following operations to occur, refer to Attachment B:

1. Activate audible circuits.

2. Actuate strobe units until the panel is reset or strobe circuit time-out.

3. Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions, shut down the ventilation system or close associated control dampers as required.


FIRE ALARM 16715-8

4. Activation of fire sprinkler system low-pressure switches, post indicator valve or tamper switches shall initiate a system supervisory alarm indication.

5. UL listed central station shall be notified via – Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT).

3.05 TESTING

A. A 48-hour notice shall be provided to the Project Inspector before final testing of the new portion of the FA system.

B. Testing of fire detection system shall be as required by the State Fire Marshal and local authorities having jurisdiction. Installer is responsible for identifying required testing, coordinating, scheduling, and conducting tests before Substantial Completion. Tests shall include the following: (not all the following may apply to specific project requirements.)

1. Operation of signal-initiating devices (smoke detectors, heat detectors, pull stations etc.).

2. Operation of indicating devices (alarm horns, alarm bells and alarm strobes).

3. Operation of system features under normal operation.

4. Operation of system supervisory features.

5. Operation of system features on standby power, with primary power turned off.

6. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

7. Open initiating device circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

8. Open signaling line circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

9. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

10. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

11. Ground signaling line circuit and verify response of trouble signals.

12. Ground notification appliance circuit and verify response of trouble signals.

13. Check alert tone to alarm notification devices.

14. Check installation, supervision, and operation of intelligent smoke detectors.

15. Alarm conditions that the system is required to detect shall be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

16. When the system is equipped with optional features, consult the manufacturer manual to determine proper testing procedures.

C. Upon completion of installation of fire alarm equipment, provide to the OAR a signed,


FIRE ALARM 16715-9

written statement confirming that fire alarm equipment was installed in accordance with the Specifications, Shop Drawings, instructions and directions provided by the manufacturer.

D. Demonstrate in presence of the Project Inspector that circuit and wiring tests are free of shorts and grounds and that installation performs as specified herein and within manufacturer’s guidelines.

E. Software Modifications:

1. Provide the services of a trained technician to perform system software modification, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the Project site shall not exceed 24 hours.

2. Provide hardware, software, programming tools, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm network on the Project site. Modification includes: addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modification on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being provided.

F. Complete the inspection and testing form as required by NFPA 72, and submit one copy of the completed form to the Architect and Project Inspector.

3.06 SERVICE MANUALS

A. Deliver required copies of the service manuals at project completion or as otherwise required by other sections of these specifications. Each manual shall include the following:

1. Installation manuals, programming manuals and user manual if applicable for every control panel, control panel power supply, FACP input or output or relay or control module, auxiliary power supply, UDACT, remote NAC extender power supply, door holder power supplies, installed annunciators, initiating and indicating devices and addressable monitor, relay and control modules. Catalog cut sheets are not acceptable.

2. A printed copy of the system configuration as programmed, including system labeling codes, and passwords.

3. An electronic copy on compact disk of the system configuration program

4. Final test report.

5. Detailed explanation of the operation of the system.

6. Instructions for routine maintenance.

7. Detailed wiring diagram for the connection of relays, addressable monitor, and control or relay modules as applied in the interfacing of peripheral systems or equipment to the fire alarm system. Updated shop drawings shall include revisions made in the field via plan changes, RFIs, Field Change Directives, and any other construction change documents including interface details with ancillary systems.


FIRE ALARM 16715-10

8. An electronic copy (CD) of the posted site or fire alarm map in Auto-Cad and pdf formats.

9. Provide a CD ROM electronic copy of the updated system As-Built Drawings to the OAR, prepare this copy in the latest version of AutoCAD; along with the electronic copy provide a full-size bond copy. Include one CD-ROM of the up-dated As-Built Drawings into each of the Service Manuals. CD and folded drawings shall be secured and inserted into the Service Manuals via a three-hole punched protective CD case and protective envelopes for the drawings.

10. Provide codes and passwords for fire alarm system at testing.

3.07 SPARE PARTS

1. Spare parts shall not be required for this project.

3.08 SYSTEM USER AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TRAINING

A. No system user training shall be required for this project.

3.09 PROTECTION


3.10 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.

END OF SECTION


PROJECT COMPLETION 16955 - 1

SECTION 16955

PROJECT COMPLETION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor shall coordinate requirements of all sections pertaining to Electrical system installation and ensure that final installation is in accordance with specifications. Prior to requesting substantial completion inspection, contractor shall furnish a letter stating that the requirements of this section have been met. Letter shall contain an itemized list indicating that each item has been personally checked by the Project Superintendent and that it is complete. In addition to this document, final test reports, maintenance manuals, “as-built” documents, and other items required by the specifications, shall be submitted.

B. This section is intended as a checklist for the contractor to ensure that items specified are properly installed and to ensure that a premature final punch list is not requested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PERFORMANCE

A. Check all systems and ensure that systems have been properly tested.

B. Provide spare parts as specified in individual sections of the specification.

C. Provide schedule of required maintenance items in Operations and Maintenance Manual. See Section 16010.

D. Verify installation of meters and instruments. Verify accuracy and readability at installed location. If unreadable correct as required.

E. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. At the time of start up ensure that control, power wring and interlocks are complete.

F. Verify that system identification specified in Section 16050 is properly and completely executed.

G. Verify proper operation of all safety controls, alarms, etc.

H. Thoroughly clean all installed items. Remove temporary covers and labels, clean paint and/or coating spatters, and vacuum inside of distribution equipment and panel boards where needed.

I. Provide touch up painting of factory-finished equipment to cover minor dents and scratches. Surface shall be prepared by light sanding or re-dusting with chemical compounds, then coated with a compatible primer and matching topcoat.

J. Provide Operations and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 16010

K. Provide verification that Owners Operating Instruction periods specified in Section 16010 have been completed.


PROJECT COMPLETION 16955 - 2

L. Where specifications call for equipment start-up by manufacturers factory personnel, submit written verification from the factory personnel performing the start up of start up tests done and results. During period of factory start-up Owners service personnel shall be present. Schedule factory personnel in a timely manner, allowing a minimum of three weeks notice. During factory start-up representatives of the installing contractor and sub-contractor where needed, shall be present. Test equipment shall be made available by the installing contractor. Prior to performing factory start up the following work shall be completed:

1. All conduit and writing shall be complete.

2. Remove all shipping ties downs or blocks.

3. All external-controlling devices shall be complete and operational.

4. Power and control wiring shall be permanently installed and connected equipment.

5. Start and run equipment for 24 hours before field operating check.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	14-Mar-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	2 times
Download:	0 times